JP2020110712A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a game in the game machine configured to be capable of changing a mode of hold display.SOLUTION: Performance execution means includes display mode change means capable of executing at least one display mode change from among a hold display mode change for changing a mode of hold display before execution of variation display of target holding storage and a variation correspondence display mode for changing a mode of variation correspondence display during execution of the variation display concerned at timing from among a plurality of pieces of timing during either a holding display period corresponding to target holding storage or a variation display period, and the display mode change means has a different selection ratio of timing for executing a display mode change according to whether a type of display of a change target is first specific display or second specific display differing from normal display.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 28

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine that can perform variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player.

As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into the game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a winning opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Further, a variable display device capable of variably displaying identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information on the variable display device is the specific display result, the gaming state (game Therefore, there is a machine configured to give a predetermined game value to a player by changing the state of the machine (specifically, the state in which the game machine is controlled) (so-called pachinko machine).

Note that the game value is a right for a state in which a state of a variable winning ball device provided in a game area of a gaming machine is advantageous for a player who easily wins a hit ball, or for an advantageous state for a player. Is generated, and the condition for paying out prize balls is easily established.

In the pachinko game machine, as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information), which is started on the variable display device based on the fact that the game ball has won at the starting winning opening, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed. When it is done, "big hit" occurs. The derivation display means that the symbol (final stop symbol) is finally stopped and displayed. When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and a big hit game state in which a hit ball is easy to win is entered. Then, in each opening period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning holes are won, the winning holes are closed. The number of times of opening the special winning opening is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). Note that the opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach the predetermined number, the special winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round. Also, a game in a round may be called a round game.

Further, in the variable display device, the symbols other than the symbol that is the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol in the left-middle-right symbol) continue for a predetermined period of time, and stop and shake in a state of being consistent with a specific display result. It is possible that a big hit occurs before the final result is displayed, because it is moving, scaling or deforming, or multiple symbols fluctuate in sync with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols are swapped. The production performed in a state in which the sex continues (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as reach production. Further, the reach state and the state thereof are referred to as the reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbols variably displayed on the variable display device is not the specific display result, the result is “out”, and the variable display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

In such a gaming machine, Cited Document 1 describes performing an effect of gradually changing one hold display mode.

JP, 2011-212304, A (paragraph number 0418 grade).

However, in the gaming machine described in the cited document 1, there is no relation between the mode of the hold display and the change timing of the hold display, and the interest of the game cannot be sufficiently improved.

Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which the mode of the hold display can be changed and which can enhance the interest of the game.

(Means 1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine which performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state), and a variation display which has not been started is withheld. Hold storage means for storing as memory (for example, the first special figure hold storage unit 151A, the second special figure hold storage unit 151B, the first start winning award reception command buffer 194A, the second start winning award reception command buffer 194B, etc.) , Hold display means (for example, image display device 5, RAM 102, first start prize storage display area 5HL, second start) that can display a hold display (for example, hold display) corresponding to the hold storage stored by the hold storage means. The winning memory display area 5HR, etc.) and the variation correspondence display means (for example, the production control CPU 120 is S532, etc.) capable of displaying the variation correspondence display (eg, active display) corresponding to the variation display during execution of the variation display. And a pre-reading notice effect (for example, a hold change effect or a zone effect) that suggests that an advantageous hold storage is stored in the hold storage stored in the hold storage means. In addition, it is possible to execute a notice effect (for example, an active display change effect, a normal expectation notice effect, or a high expectation notice effect for the change) that suggests that the variation display being executed is in an advantageous state. A certain effect executing means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes S172, S532, etc.) is provided, and the effect executing means changes the mode of the hold display before the variable display of the target hold storage is executed. 38 to change the hold display mode (for example, change during hold display shown in FIG. 38) and change to the change corresponding display mode to change the mode of the change corresponding display during execution of the change display (for example, change during active display shown in FIG. 39). ) And at least any one of the plurality of timings during the period of the variable display period and the pending display period corresponding to the target pending storage. The display mode changing unit includes change means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes S532 shown in FIG. 27, icon effect setting processing shown in FIG. 40, and processing such as S172 shown in FIG. 22). Of the first specific display (for example, the character icon display shown in FIG. 36A) and the second specific display (for example, the character icon display shown in FIG. 36B) different from the normal display. Depending on which is, The selection ratio of the timings to be executed is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 28B and 28C), the character icon display has a high change effect execution ratio during the hold display, and the character icon display has the change effect execution during the active display. The percentage is high. Then, as shown in FIGS. 28F to 28M, the rate at which the display mode is actually changed during execution of the change effect is the same during the hold display and during the active display. Therefore, depending on whether it is the character icon display or the character icon display, the frequency with which the display mode of the icon changes is different between the hold display and the active display, and the hold display and the active display are different. The ratio of selecting which of the display modes is changed is different. ), the effect execution means executes the notice effect in accordance with the execution mode of the prefetch notice effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the hold change effect and the zone effect in the notice effect setting process shown in FIG. 42). 44 to 46, one of the first to fourth high expectation effect pattern tables shown in FIGS. 44 to 46 is selected to set the high expectation effect for the fluctuation).
According to such a configuration, with respect to the pending display mode change and the change-corresponding display mode change, the player can be made to pay attention to the display type of the change target and the timing of the display mode change. The interest of the game can be improved.

(Means 2) In the means 1, the effect executing means limits the number of times of execution of the look-ahead notice effect and the notice effect in which the degree of expectation for the variable display is higher than the predetermined degree (for example, the high-expectation pending change effect and the high expectation degree). By setting a high-expectation effect for the change depending on whether or not the zone effect is performed, the number of times the high-expectation effect is executed is controlled through the look-ahead notice effect and the notice effect for the change. 44 to 46)).
With such a configuration, it is possible to manage the number of times the effect is performed, the expectation of which is higher than the predetermined degree.

(Means 3) In the means 1 or the means 2, the effect execution means executes the pre-reading notice effect and the notice effect such that the expectation level is different depending on the execution timing even if the effect contents are the same (for example, character icon display). 28B and 28C, the proportion of selection of the display mode change of the character icon during active display is lower than during hold display, but FIG. 28F to FIG. As described above, when the big hit display result is obtained, the ratio of the display mode change to the “extreme heat” display having a high level of expectation is selected more frequently during the active display than during the hold display. Even if the expectation of a big hit is higher when the display changes to the "opportunity" display or the "two people" display than when the display changes to the "opportunity" display or the "two people" display. It's ok, but the expectation that a big hit will change when the active display is changed to the "heat" or "three people" display rather than the "heat" display or the "three people" display is displayed. It may be made higher).
With such a configuration, it is possible to focus attention on the timing at which the effect is executed.

It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an aspect of the present invention. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example etc of contents of production control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the game random number counted by the main board side. It is a figure which illustrates a variation category and a variation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a jackpot type determination table. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a data holding area for game control. It is the figure which shows the constitution example and the like of production control pattern. It is the block diagram etc which shows the constitution example of the data retention area for production control. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the timer interruption processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning determination process in the special symbol process process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart etc. which show an example of a random number value determination process at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of selection of a variation category determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a variation category determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a figure which shows the example of setting of the determination rate of a fluctuation pattern. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of command analysis processing. It is the flowchart which shows production control process treatment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the winning a prize production determination processing in the production control process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the winning a prize production determination processing in the production control process processing. It is a figure which shows the example of setting of the determination rate of the display mode of a hold display. It is a diagram showing a zone effect selection table. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing. It is the figure which shows the production pattern table at the time of reservation selection. It is a figure which shows the example of setting of the determination rate of the production aspect at the time of active display change production execution. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination rate by the production|generation execution timing determination table at the time of 1st system change production execution. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the other setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of a hold display. It is a figure which shows the other example of a setting of the determination rate by the active display change production execution presence/absence determination table. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination rate by the 1st system detailed pattern determination table at the time of 1st system change production execution. It is a timing chart showing the relationship between the display mode change effect and the presence or absence of display mode change execution in the display mode change effect. It is a figure which shows a character icon selection table and a character icon selection table. It is a figure which shows a change production pattern table. It is a display screen diagram showing an example of an effect display when a character icon is displayed as a hold display on the image display device. It is a display screen diagram showing an example of an effect display of active display after displaying a character icon as a hold display on the image display device. It is a flow chart which shows icon effect setting processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of production which selects the execution timing of the display mode change production during hold display from a some timing. It is a flow chart which shows notice production setting processing. It is a figure showing a normal expectation effect pattern table. It is a figure showing the 1st high expectation production pattern table. It is a figure which shows the 2nd high expectation effect pattern table and the 3rd high expectation effect pattern table. It is a figure which shows the 4th high expectation production pattern table.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. On the game board 2, a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails is formed. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into it.

A normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided in the lower part of the game area of the game board 2. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball device 6B has a pair of movable blades that are changed by the solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. 2 between a normal open state in a vertical position and an expanded open state in a tilted position. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided, and a start area (second start area) second start winning opening is formed.

As an example, in the normal variable winning ball device 6B, when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the off state, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning hole. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball passes through the second starting winning port by the tilt control in which the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the ON state. It will be in an enlarged open state that is easy to enter. Although the normal variable winning ball device 6B allows the game ball to enter the second starting winning port even in the normally open state, the game ball may enter more than in the expanded opening state. It may be configured to be low. Alternatively, the normal variable winning ball device 6B may be configured so that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening in the normally open state. As described above, the second starting winning opening as the second starting area is in an enlarged open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and in a normally opened state in which the game ball is difficult to pass (enter) or cannot pass (enter). Changes to.

The game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by, for example, the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. 2, for example. The winning when the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A is referred to as a first starting winning. In addition, the winning when the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B is referred to as a second starting winning.

A predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls based on the fact that the game balls that have passed (entered) the first start winning opening are detected by the first start opening switch 22A (based on the occurrence of the first start winning combination). Is paid out as a prize ball, and if the first special figure reservation storage number (described later) is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), the first special symbol executed in the first special symbol display device 4A A first starting condition (also referred to as a first execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as a game (described later) or a variable display (described later) of a decorative pattern executed on the image display device 5 is established. In addition, based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B (based on the occurrence of the second starting winning opening), a predetermined number (for example, 3) While the game ball is paid out as a prize ball, if the second special figure reservation storage number (described later) is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), the second special symbol display device 4B is executed. A second start condition (also referred to as a second execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game (described later) or a variable display (described later) of a decorative pattern executed on the image display device 5 is established. The number of prize balls paid out based on the first starting prize and the number of prize balls paid out based on the second starting prize may be the same or different from each other.

The first special figure reservation storage number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the first starting prize) that are not immediately executed when the first starting prize is generated and are temporarily suspended for execution. Even if the first start condition for executing the variable display game such as the first special figure game (described later) or the variable display of decorative symbols (described later) is satisfied due to the occurrence of the first start prize, the first start If the first start condition that allows the start of the above-described variable display game due to the occurrence of a prize is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition that was previously satisfied is being executed). If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is suspended (the variable display game is in a waiting state). In other words, the first special figure reservation storage number is the number of variable display games due to the occurrence of the first start winning awaiting execution. The number of the 1st special figure reservation storage decreases one by one whenever one 1st start condition is materialized.

Information regarding the variable display corresponding to the first starting prize, in which the first starting condition according to a certain first starting prize is satisfied, but the first starting condition for allowing the start of the variable display game according to the first starting prize is not satisfied Is stored (held) as hold data (first special figure hold information) until the first start condition that allows the start of the variable display game with the first start winning is satisfied. In other words, the held first special figure suspension information is consumed one by one each time the first start condition is satisfied, and the variable display game is executed based on the digested first special figure suspension information.

The second special figure hold storage number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the second start prize) that are temporarily not executed immediately after the occurrence of the second start prize and are suspended. Even if the second start condition for executing the variable display game such as the second special figure game (described later) or the variable display of decorative symbols (described later) is satisfied due to the occurrence of the second start winning, the second start is performed. When the second start condition that allows the start of the above-described variable display game due to the occurrence of a prize is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition that was previously satisfied is being executed). If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is suspended (the variable display game is in a waiting state). That is, the second special figure reservation storage number is the number of variable display games due to the occurrence of the second start winning awaiting execution. The second special figure reservation storage number is decreased by one each time one of the second start conditions is satisfied.

Information regarding the variable display corresponding to the second starting prize, in which the second starting condition according to a certain second starting prize is satisfied, but the second starting condition for allowing the start of the variable display game according to the second starting prize is not satisfied Is stored (held) as hold data (second special figure hold information) until the second start condition that allows the start of the variable display game with the second start winning is satisfied. In other words, the held second special figure suspension information is consumed one by one each time the second start condition is satisfied, and the variable display game is executed based on the digested second special figure suspension information.

When the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as "starting winning opening". In addition, when the first start prize and the second start prize are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as "start prize". In addition, the number of reserved storages obtained by adding the first special figure reserved storage number and the second special figure reserved storage number is referred to as "total reserved storage number". When the first special figure reservation storage number, the second special figure reservation storage number, and the total reservation storage number are not particularly distinguished, they are usually simply referred to as "special figure reservation storage number", but simply "special figure reservation". When referred to as "memory number", it may refer to any one or two of the first special figure reserved storage number, the second special figure reserved storage number, and the total reserved storage number. Further, when the first starting condition and the second starting condition are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as “starting condition” or “execution condition”. In addition, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as “start condition”. Further, the first special figure reservation information and the second special figure reservation information are also simply referred to as “special figure reservation information” unless particularly distinguished.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in a lower portion of the game area of the game board 2 (below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B). The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door shown in FIG. 2, and serves as a specific area that is changed to an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. Form a big winning hole.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is in the OFF state, the special winning opening door closes the special winning opening, and the game ball passes through (enters) the special winning opening. Disable it. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is in the ON state, the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening, and the game ball passes through (enters) the special winning opening. ) Make it easier. In this way, the special winning opening as a specific area changes between an open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state where the game ball cannot pass (entry) and is disadvantageous to the player. To do. Instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) the special winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) the special winning opening may be provided.

The game ball that has passed (entered) the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is detected by the count switch 23 shown in FIG. 2, for example. Based on the fact that the game ball has been detected by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the large winning opening that has been opened in the special variable winning ball device 7, the game ball passes through another winning opening such as the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. More prize balls are paid out than when they passed (entered). Therefore, when the special winning opening is opened in the special variable winning ball device 7, the game ball can enter the special winning opening, which is the first state advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the special winning opening is closed in the special variable winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult to get the winning ball by passing (entering) the game ball into the special winning opening. The second state is disadvantageous for the person.

A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided on the right side of the game area on the game board 2. The first special symbol display device 4A is composed of, for example, a 7-segment or dot-matrix LED (light emitting diode) or the like. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. The first special symbol display device 4A variably displays a special symbol (also referred to as "special symbol") that is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can identify each (called variable display or variable display). To do. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. The special symbols (special symbols) variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also referred to as “first special symbols”, and the special symbols (special symbols) variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are “special symbols”. It is also referred to as "second special view". A game executed with variable display of identification information (or a variable display of identification information itself) is called a variable display game. In particular, the variable display game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A (variable display game for variably displaying the first special symbol) is also referred to as a first special symbol game, and the variable display game executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. The (variable display game in which the second special figure is variably displayed) is also referred to as a second special figure game. Further, when the first special figure game and the second special figure game are not distinguished from each other, they are simply referred to as “special figure game”.

The first special symbol display device 4A (similarly to the second special symbol display device 4B) has a plurality of types of numbers including "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-" as a special figure game. Variable display of special symbols. A symbol number corresponding to each special symbol is attached to each special symbol. As an example, if each of the numbers indicating “0” to “9” is given a symbol number of “0” to “9”, and if the symbol of “−” is given a symbol number of “10” Good. The special symbols are not limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. For example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns (for example, lighting patterns such as L and E of the alphabet) in which the combination of turning on and turning off the 7-segment LED are different are set in advance, and as special symbols. It may be displayed.

On the right side of the game area on the game board 2 (the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B), a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided. .. The first hold indicator 25A is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and identifies the first special figure hold storage number (the first special figure game hold number) based on the hold data (first special figure hold information). A first hold display is displayed to enable display. For example, the first hold indicator 25A displays the first special figure hold storage number in a identifiable manner by the number of LEDs to be turned on. For example, when the holding number of the first special figure game is increased by 1 by the establishment of the new first starting condition, the number of lights is increased by 1, and the first special figure game is suspended by the establishment of the new first start condition. If the number of lights decreases by one, the number of lights may be decreased by one. The second hold indicator 25B is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the second special figure hold storage number (the hold number of the second special figure game) based on the hold data (second special figure hold information). A second hold display for enabling display is performed. For example, the second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold storage number so that it can be specified by the number of LEDs to be turned on. For example, when the holding number of the second special figure game is increased by one by the establishment of the new second starting condition, the number of lights is increased by one, and the second special figure game is put on hold by the establishment of the new second starting condition. If the number of lights decreases by one, the number of lights may be decreased by one.

On the left side of the game area on the game board 2, there are provided a passage gate 41, a normal symbol display device 20, and a universal symbol reservation display device 25C. The game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by, for example, the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21, if the number of ordinary figure holding memory (described later) is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), the normal symbol display 20 The universal figure starting condition for executing the universal figure game (described later) executed in step 1 is established.

Normally, the symbol display device 20 is composed of 7-segment or dot-matrix LEDs and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The normal symbol display device 20 variably displays (variable display) a normal symbol (also referred to as "general symbol" or "ordinary symbol") that is a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. The variable display game in which the normal symbols are variably displayed is also referred to as a normal figure game (or "normal figure game"). Information relating to the universal figure game in which the universal figure start condition is satisfied but the universal figure start condition (described later) is not stored is stored (held) as suspension data (public figure suspension information).

The universal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure reserves based on the hold data (public figure hold information) by the number of LEDs to be turned on, for example. The number of ordinary figure holding memory is the number of ordinary figure games which are not executed immediately when the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 and whose execution is temporarily held. Even if the universal figure starting condition for executing the universal figure game is established by the detection of the game ball by the gate switch 21, if the universal figure starting condition that allows the start of the universal figure game is not established ( For example, when the previously established universal figure game is being executed), the execution of the relevant universal figure game is suspended (the relevant universal figure game is in a waiting state for execution). That is, the number of public figure reservation storages is the number of game of the general figure game in the state of waiting for execution. The number of stored universal figure reservations decreases by one each time one universal figure start condition is satisfied.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images.

In the display area of the image display device 5, a decorative pattern display area is arranged. In the decorative pattern display area, a decorative pattern that is a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) capable of identifying each is variably displayed (also referred to as variable display). The variable display of the decoration identification information (decorative pattern) is also included in the variable display game. The image display device 5 is a first special symbol game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A (a special symbol game using the first special symbol), or a second special symbol executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. Corresponding to the game (special figure game using the second special figure), variable display of a plurality of types of decorative patterns is executed in the display area (decorative pattern display area).

As an example, as shown in FIG. 1, in the display area of the image display device 5, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game of the first special figure game or the second special figure game, that is, corresponding to the start of the fluctuation of the special figure of the first special figure or the second special figure Then, in each of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation of the decorative design (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. After that, in response to the end of the special drawing game, that is, in response to the stop display of the special drawing, in each of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, the decorative design that becomes the variable display result (the fixed design, the final design (Also referred to as a stop symbol) is stopped and displayed. That is, in the display area (decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R) of the image display device 5, the variation of the decorative pattern is started in association with (corresponding to) the first special figure game (or the second special figure game), The fixed decorative design (also called the final stop design) is stopped and displayed.

The decorative pattern is, for example, 8 types of patterns (alphanumeric characters "1" to "8" or Chinese numerals, English characters, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters or symbols and character images). Etc., and the character image may be, for example, a person, an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or a decorative image showing any other figure). A symbol number corresponding to each decorative pattern is attached to each decorative pattern. As an example, each of the alphanumeric characters indicating "1" to "8" may be assigned a symbol number of "1" to "8". Note that the decorative patterns are not limited to eight types, and may be of any type (eg, seven types or nine types) as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a big hit combination and a lost combination can be configured.

Variable display result of special symbols (also called special symbol display result) Stop display to stop and display the fixed special symbol and end the variable display, and fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) which is variable display result of decorative symbol Stop display to stop and display the variable display, and stop display to display the fixed normal symbol that is the variable display result (also referred to as general figure display result) of the normal symbol and stop the variable display, It is also referred to as a stop display, a final stop display, or a derived display (or simply “derived”). The variation start timing and variation end timing of the decorative symbol do not necessarily have to match the variation start timing and variation end timing of the special symbol, and within the variation time of the special symbol (special symbol variation time), It suffices if the change time is settled.

That is, the variation start timing of the decorative symbol may be later than the variation start timing of the special symbol, and the variation end timing of the special symbol (stop display timing of the fixed special symbol) is the variation end timing of the decorative symbol (stop of the fixed symbol) It may be later than the display timing). For example, the execution of the predetermined effect may be started after the fixed decorative design is stopped and displayed, and the fixed special symbol may be stopped and displayed at the end of the execution of the predetermined effect. An example of the predetermined effect is a simple hold effect (described later) that is one mode of the hold effect (described later).

Further, a stop display different from the complete stop display (final stop display, derived display) may be displayed. For example, the decorative design may be temporarily stopped and displayed during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the derivation display of the fixed decorative design. In the temporary stop display, a decorative pattern whose fluctuation speed is “0” is displayed for a while, for example, while causing a slight shake or expansion/contraction, or is shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). It includes those that stop and display without causing time, slight shaking, stretching, etc.

Further, in the display area of the image display device 5, a first starting prize winning memory display area 5HL and a second starting winning prize memory display area 5HR are arranged. In the first starting prize winning memory display area 5HL, as with the first reserved display device 25A, the first reserved display for displaying the first special figure reserved memory number in a identifiable manner is performed. That is, the number of the first special figure games that are currently being executed is displayed so that they can be specified. In the first start winning a prize memory display area 5HL, the second hold display for displaying the second special figure hold storage number in a identifiable manner is performed, as in the second hold display 25B. That is, the number of the second special figure games which are currently being executed is displayed so that they can be specified.

In addition, in the first start winning a prize memory display area 5HL, the first hold display may be performed, for example, right-justified. That is, when the number of holdings of the first special figure game increases due to the establishment of the new first starting condition, if there is no other first holding display in the first starting winning prize memory display area 5HL, the first starting winning prize memory display is displayed. On the right side of the area 5HL (the center side of the display area of the image display device 5), a new first hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the increased first special figure hold information, and the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL is added. If there is another first hold display in the above, the new first hold is displayed on the left side of the other first hold display (if there are a plurality of other first hold displays, further left side of the leftmost first hold display). Additional displays may be added. In addition, when there are a plurality of first hold indications in the first start winning a prize memory display area 5HL and the hold number of the first special figure game decreases due to the establishment of the new first start condition, the first amount of decrease The first hold display (the first hold display displayed from the oldest) displayed on the rightmost side of the first start prize winning memory display area 5HL corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special figure hold information is erased, Each of the other first hold displays is moved (shifted) to the erased first hold display side (right side).

Further, in the second starting prize winning memory display area 5HR, for example, the second hold display may be performed by left-justifying. That is, when the number of holdings of the second special figure game increases due to the establishment of the new second starting condition, if there is no other second holding display in the second starting winning prize memory display area 5HR, the second starting winning prize memory display is displayed. On the left side of the area 5HR (the center side of the display area of the image display device 5), a new second hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the increased second special figure hold information, and the second start winning a prize memory display area 5HR is added. If there is another second hold display in the above, the new second hold is displayed on the right side of the other second hold display (if there are a plurality of other second hold displays, further right side of the rightmost second hold display). Additional displays may be added.

In addition, when there are a plurality of second hold indications in the second start winning a prize memory display area 5HR and the hold number of the second special figure game decreases due to the establishment of the new second start condition, the second decrease Erase the second hold display (the second hold display that has been displayed from the oldest) displayed on the leftmost side of the second start winning prize memory display area 5HR corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special figure hold information, Each of the other second hold displays is moved (shifted) to the erased second hold display side (left side). In addition, when the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL and the second starting prize winning memory display area 5HR are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as "starting prize memory display area 5H".

In addition, in the display area of the image display device 5, as a hold display area, in addition to the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL and the second starting winning prize memory display area 5HR, the first starting prize winning memory display area 5HL and the second starting prize winning memory display area 5HL. The hold display erased (moved) from the start winning prize memory display area 5HR (that is, the first special figure hold information that is consumed when the first start condition is satisfied, and the second special diagram hold information that is consumed when the second start condition is satisfied). Display a special image showing information including active display (also referred to as variable correspondence display, display at digestion, this time display, etc.) corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the decorative pattern executed based on the special figure hold information Active display area AHA (variable display area, display area during exhaustion, display area during exhaustion, current hold display area, current hold display area, active hold display area, active hold display area, active display area, this time display area, this time display area Area (also referred to as an in-digestion display portion, etc.) is disposed, for example, between the first start prize winning memory display area 5HL and the second start prize winning memory display area 5HR.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the active display area AHA is arranged between the first starting prize winning memory display area 5HL and the second starting winning prize memory display area 5HR. The display area AHA may be arranged at any position in the display area of the image display device 5. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in addition to the active display, the active display frame surrounding the active display, the active display, or the active display of characters or images displayed around the active display frame or around the active display frame. Information and the like corresponding to are displayed by a special image.

In the game area of the game board 2, a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails for changing the flow direction and speed of the game balls are provided in addition to the above-mentioned configuration. Further, as the winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the big winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. You may be asked. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that the game ball that has entered one of the general winning openings has been detected by a predetermined general winning ball switch. .. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball as a game medium toward a game area. For example, the hit ball operation handle adjusts the elastic force of the game ball according to the amount of operation (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hit ball operation handle may be provided with a single-shot launch switch for stopping the drive of the launch motor included in the hit ball launching device, and a touch ring (touch sensor).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so that it can be supplied to the ball striking device. An upper plate (striking ball supply plate) is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3, a lower plate is provided for holding (storing) surplus balls and the like overflowing from the upper plate so that they can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

A stick controller 31A, which can be held by a player and tilted by a player, is attached to a member forming the lower tray, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower tray body (for example, a central portion of the lower tray). There is. The stick controller 31A includes an operating stick held by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operating stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operating hand is applied when the player holds the operating stick). There is. The trigger button can perform a predetermined instruction operation by pushing and pulling with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 31A with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). It may be configured as follows. A trigger sensor for detecting a predetermined instruction operation such as a push/pull operation on the trigger button may be built in the operation rod.

A tilting direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate below the stick controller 31A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit includes two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operating rod when viewed from the side of the player who faces the pachinko gaming machine 1. Pair) and four transmission type photosensors (vertical sensor pair) that are arranged perpendicularly to the board surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operating rod when viewed from the player side. It may be configured to include a photo sensor.

As a member forming the upper plate, for example, a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 31A) or the like. It is provided. The push button 31B may be configured to be capable of mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detecting a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation by the player. A push sensor may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the position where the push button 31B is installed, or the like, for detecting an operation action of the player performed on the push button 31B.

A sound output member is provided in the periphery of the game area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the speaker 8UL and the speaker 8UR are installed at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and the speaker 8LL and the speaker 8LR are provided at the left and right oblique lower parts of the upper plate (the left and right oblique upper parts of the lower plate). It is installed. Hereinafter, the speakers 8UL, 8UR, 8LL, and 8LR will be simply referred to as the speakers 8 unless otherwise distinguished. The speaker 8 outputs (reproduces) voice (sound and voice). For example, the speaker 8 outputs an effect sound (also called a sound effect) according to the progress of the game of the gaming machine 1, and outputs a warning sound according to the situation of the gaming machine 1.

The effect sound includes music, detection sound, response sound, notification sound, and the like. The music in the effect sound is, for example, BGM, a song, or the like that is output according to the progress of the game. The detected sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound, a voice (serif, message) or the like that is output according to the detection result by the switch or the sensor (for example, the detection of the winning of the first starting winning opening or the like). The response sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound, a voice, or the like that is output according to an operation action on the push button 31B. Since the operation action on the push button 31B is also detected by the push sensor, the response sound output according to the operation action on the push button 31B is also a detection sound. The notification sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound or a voice that is issued to request an operation action on the push button 31B, or a sound or a voice that notifies that the reach state (to be described later) is entered when the reach state (described later) is entered. , A sound, voice, or the like that gives a notice or suggests that the jackpot game state will be entered before the jackpot game state is entered.

Examples of the warning sound are a warning sound output when the game ball is excessively held (stored) in the lower plate, a warning sound output when the glass door (not shown) is open, and the like. ..

A light emitting member (light emitting body) that emits light as an effect or a decoration is provided inside and around the game area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the light emitting member 9CC is installed in the upper position of the image display device 5, the light emitting members 9CL and 9CR are installed in the left and right positions of the image display device 5, and the light emitting member is installed in the upper position of the gaming machine frame 3. 9U, the light emitting member 9SL, the light emitting member 9SR is installed at the left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. Hereinafter, the light emitting members 9CC, 9CL, 9CR, 9U, 9SL, and 9SR will be collectively referred to as the lamp 9 unless otherwise distinguished. The lamp 9 may be composed of, for example, one or more LEDs, or may be composed of a flash lamp. The light emitting member 9U may be a rotating lamp (for example, a patrol lamp) having a rotating portion. In addition to the above, various light emitting members may be installed around each structure (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 or the like) in the game area.

The image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, and the like are effect devices that perform effects, but the gaming machine 1 may include other effect devices such as effect models having a drive unit as effect devices.

The arrangement position (installation position) of each component is an example, and may be arranged at another position. For example, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display 20 may be provided on the same side (right side portion or left side portion) of the game area. Further, for example, the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the universal figure hold indicator 25C may be provided on the same side (right side portion or left side portion) of the game area.

Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the universal figure display device 20 starts the universal figure game based on the establishment of the universal figure start condition after the establishment of the universal figure start condition. In the normal figure game, after starting the variable display of the normal symbol (after starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol), when the predetermined time that is the normal symbol change time elapses, the fixed normal symbol that becomes the variable display result of the normal symbol Is stopped (displayed). At this time, as a fixed ordinary symbol, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) such as a number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed, the variable display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per symbol”. On the other hand, as the fixed ordinary symbol, if a regular symbol other than the regular symbol, such as a number or a symbol other than the number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed, the variable display result of the regular symbol is “ordinary symbol loss”. Become. In response to the fact that the variable display result of the ordinary symbol is "universal symbol", the expansion opening control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normally variable winning ball device 6B is in the tilt position. When a predetermined time elapses, the normal opening control for returning to the vertical position is performed.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special drawing game (first special drawing game) by the first special symbol display device 4A is started based on the first starting condition being satisfied after the first starting condition is satisfied, and the second Based on that the second start condition is satisfied after the start condition is satisfied, the special figure game (second special figure game) by the second special symbol display device 4B is started. In the special figure game, after starting the variable display of the special symbol (after starting the fluctuation of the special symbol), when the variable display time as the special symbol change time elapses, the variable display result of the special symbol becomes the fixed special. Derivatively display the design (results of special figure display). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, the result is "big hit" as a specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. If so, the predetermined display result is "small hit". Also, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it becomes "miss".

After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as a specific game state in which a round advantageous to the player (also called "round game") is executed a predetermined number of times. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", the small hit game state is controlled as a special game state different from the big hit game state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, as an example, the special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” are the big hit symbols, and the special symbols indicating the numbers “2” are the small hit symbols, The special symbol showing the symbol "-" is a lost symbol. In addition, each symbol such as a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, and a lost symbol in the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is different from each symbol in the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. It may be a symbol, and a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol.

After the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game and becomes the "big hit" as the specific display result, the big winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 has a predetermined upper limit time in the big hit gaming state. The special winning opening is opened for a period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 seconds) or for a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls. As a result, a round in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is brought into the first state (open state), which is advantageous for the player, is executed.

The special winning a prize sphere device, by receiving the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2, and then closing the big winning a prize, the big prize award door which opened the big prize award during the execution of the round. 7 is changed to a second state (closed state), which is disadvantageous to the player, and one round is ended. The round, which is the opening cycle of the special winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of times of execution reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, "15"). Even before the number of times the round has been executed reaches the upper limit, the execution of the round may be ended when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball has not won in the special winning opening).

Among the rounds in the big hit game state, the round in which the upper limit time for setting the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player is a relatively long time (for example, 29 seconds) is normally opened. Also called a round. On the other hand, a round in which the upper limit time for which the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the first state (open state) is a relatively short time (for example, 0.1 seconds) is also called a short-term open round.

Of the special symbols showing the numbers "3", "5", "7" which are big hit symbols, the special symbols showing the numbers "3", "7" are usually open round big hit symbols and the number "5" The special design that indicates is a short-term open round jackpot design. In the special opening game, the special opening winning jackpot of the special variable winning ball device 7 in the big opening gaming state (normal opening big hitting state) as the normal opening round specific game state that is controlled after the big opening winning symbol is derived. The door opens the special winning opening in a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) which is a first period elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls are generated. As a result, a round in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player is executed. The normal open jackpot state is also called the first specific game state.

Short-term open round as a definite special symbol in the special figure game Short-term open round controlled after the big-hit symbol is derived. In the big-hit gaming state (short-term open big-hit state) as a specific game state, the special variable winning ball device 7 is used in each round. The upper limit time (upper limit of the period in which the special winning opening is opened by the special winning opening door) for changing to the first state, which is advantageous to the player, is shorter than the first period in the normally open big hit state (for example, 0 1 second). It should be noted that in the short-term open big hit state, the opening period of the special winning opening may be controlled to be the second period, and other controls may be performed in the same manner as in the normal open big hit state. Alternatively, in the short-term open jackpot state, the number of times the round is executed may be the second round number (eg, “2”) smaller than the first round number (eg, “15”) in the normal open jackpot state.

In such a short-term open big hit state, if a game ball wins the special winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of payout balls (prize balls) can be obtained. However, the opening period of the special winning opening is the second period (0.1 seconds or the like), which is very short. Therefore, the short-term open big hit state is a big hit game state in which a payout (prize ball) is practically not obtained. The short-term open jackpot state is also called the second specific game state.

In addition, the big hit game state as the short-term open round specific game state is not limited to one in which the big winning opening period is shorter than the big hit game state as the normal open round specific gaming state, and for example, the big winning opening is opened. The period (upper limit time) is the same in the short-term open round specific game state and the normal open-round specific game state, but in the short-term open round specific game state, the upper limit number of times (for example, 2 times) that the special winning opening is in the open state is It may be smaller than the upper limit number of times (for example, 15 times) in the normal opening round specific game state. That is, in the big hit game state as the short-term open round specific game state, the period during which the big winning opening is changed to the first state where the game ball easily passes (enters) in each round is longer than the first period in the normal open round specific game state. The second period is also shorter, and the number of times the round is executed is at least one of the second round number that is smaller than the first round number in the normal open round specific gaming state. ..

In this way, the big hit game state is an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. Advantageous advantages for the player may include other advantageous states such as a probability variation state (high probability state), a time saving state, and a high base state, in addition to the above-described big hit game state.

After the special symbol indicating the number "2" which is the small hit symbol is derived as the fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, it is controlled to the small hit game state as the special game state. In this small hitting game state, as in the short-term open big hitting state, in the special variable winning a prize ball device 7, the variable winning operation for changing the special winning opening to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player is performed. That is, in the small hitting game state, for example, the operation of setting the special variable winning ball device 7 in the first state (open state) is repeatedly executed for the second period.

In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R arranged in the display area of the image display device 5, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In response to the start of one of the special drawing games among the games, the variable display of the decorative design is started. In the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variable display state of the decorative pattern is changed to a specific variable during the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the end of the variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern. There may be a predetermined reach state that forms part of the display combination.

The reach state refers to a decorative pattern (also referred to as a “reach variation pattern”) that is not yet stopped and displayed when the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the big hit combination. Is a display state in which the fluctuation continues, or a display state in which all or a part of the decorative patterns are synchronously fluctuating while forming all or a part of the big hit combination. In addition, in the following description, reaching the reach state is also referred to as reaching the reach (establishing the reach).

In addition, in response to the reach state, the changing speed of the decorative design is reduced, or a character image (effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative design is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. By changing the display mode of the background image, playing back and displaying a moving image different from the decorative pattern, or changing the variation mode of the decorative pattern, a performance effect different from that before the reach state is executed. May be done. The production operation such as the display of the character image or the display mode of the background image, the reproduction display of the moving image, and the change of the variation mode of the decorative pattern is referred to as reach production (or reach production display). In addition, in the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 5, but also the sound output operation by the speaker 8 and the light emitting operation (lighting operation, blinking operation, extinguishing operation) of the lamp 9 and the like before the reach state is set. The operation mode may be different from the operation mode of.

As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of kinds of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, depending on the effect pattern, the possibility that the big hit combination or the like will be finally stopped and displayed after the reach effect (also referred to as "big hit expectation" or "big hit reliability") may be different. Thereby, the jackpot expectation can be made different depending on which of the plurality of types of reach effects is executed, that is, which reach effect is to appear. As an example, in the present embodiment, a reach mode of normal reach and a reach mode of super reach, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the normal reach, are set (prepared) in advance.

The jackpot expectation degree is, for example, (probability that the effect is executed during the jackpot)×(probability that the jackpot will occur)/{(probability that the effect will be executed during the jackpot)×(probability that the jackpot will occur)+(except during the jackpot) Is calculated (probability that the effect is executed)×(probability that big hit does not occur)} (when the expectation of big hit is “1”, the variable display result is always “big hit”).

Further, during the variable display of the decorative pattern, as one mode of the variable display effect, a sliding effect, a pseudo continuous effect, etc., which are realized by a variable display operation of the decorative pattern can be executed. In the sliding effect, after changing the decorative design in all of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, in a plurality of decorative design display areas (for example, "left" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5R, etc.) After the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, a predetermined number (for example, "1" or "2") of decorative design display areas (for example, "left" decorative design display area 5L) are displayed in the temporarily stopped display of the decorative design. In the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R (either one or both), the decorative pattern is changed again, and then stopped and displayed, thereby effecting display for changing the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed. In this way, in the sliding effect, a plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed after the variable display of the decorative symbols is started until the fixed decorative symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, and then the predetermined number of decorative symbols are changed. By executing the display again, there are times when the variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes the reach state and when the decorative pattern that does not reach the reach state and constitutes the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed.

In the pseudo continuous production, in response to one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special drawing game being satisfied once, the fixed display that becomes the variable display result after the variable display of the decorative design is started By the time the symbols are derived and displayed, all the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R (for example, a predetermined pseudo continuous chance or the like is a part of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R or (Displayed in all) is temporarily stopped and then, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, re-variable display, which is an effect display for starting variable display of all decorative symbols, is repeated a predetermined number of times ( (For example, up to 4 times).

In the present embodiment, the number of times of re-variable display (re-variable display number) in the pseudo continuous production is variable display (first variable) until all the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped. Number of times of display) (1 time), number of times of re-variable display (final variable display) after the temporary stop of all decorative patterns (1 time), and re-variable between initial variable display and final variable display The number of times X of display (X is 0 or 1 or more) and the number of times (X+2) that is the sum of the number of times of display (X+2) are grasped as one number of times (X+1). In addition, the number of times of re-variable display is the same as the number of times (temporary stop number) in which all the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The first variable display to the first temporary stop display are also referred to as the first pseudo continuous, the second variable display (the first re-variable display) to the second temporary stop display are also referred to as the second pseudo continuous, and the third pseudo display. Variable display (second re-variable display) to the third temporary stop display is also referred to as the third pseudo-link, and the fourth variable display (third re-variable display) to the fourth temporary stop display is the fourth time. Also referred to as the pseudo-regular. In addition, the number of pseudo consecutives in the pseudo consecutive production is also referred to as a pseudo consecutive variation number (or a pseudo consecutive number). That is, the number of times of pseudo continuous fluctuation, the number of times of revariable display, and the number of times of temporary stop are the same. The increase in the number of pseudo runs such as the first time, the second time, the third time,... Is also referred to as “the pseudo run continues”.

In the variable display effect of "pseudo-run", the variable design is changed based on the fact that the re-variable display (re-fluctuation) is performed once to four times so that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once. The display can be made to appear as if it was started two to five times in a row.

In the pseudo continuous production, before the reach is established in the variation (before the reach state is reached), the pseudo continuous chance eye is temporarily stopped and displayed in any or all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. As described above, the decorative designs in all the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be temporarily stopped, and after the reach is established, the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are simulated partially. The decorative symbols in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be temporarily stopped so that the consecutive chances are temporarily stopped and displayed. In other words, in the production mode of the temporary stop display in the pseudo continuous production, there are at least a production mode in which the temporary stop display is performed before the reach state and a production mode in which the chance symbol is temporarily displayed after the reach state. May be.

The sliding effect (similarly to the pseudo continuous effect) may be a notice or a suggestion to the player that any one of the reach effects, a certain reach effect may be executed, the jackpot expectation is high, or the like. .. Hereinafter, an effect for giving a notice or suggesting to the player that any one of the reach effects or a certain reach effect may be executed or that the jackpot expectation degree is high may be collectively referred to as an announcement effect. The notice production may use a variable display operation different from the slide production or the pseudo continuous production in addition to the slide production or the pseudo continuous production, for example, a background image display, a message window display, There may be one that uses an effect operation different from the variable display effect, such as hold display, voice output, light emission (lighting, blinking, and extinction).

In the present embodiment, as the notice effect, it is common to change the display mode of the special image showing the information including the active display corresponding to the pending display corresponding to the variation and to not change the display mode of the special image. Includes common effects performed in. Further, the notice effect includes a success effect that changes the display mode of the special image after executing the common effect, and a failure effect that does not change the display mode of the special image after executing the common effect. The notice effect may include suggestive effect that suggests a common effect. Further, as with the common effect, the suggestive effect may be an effect that is commonly executed when the display mode of the special image is changed and when the display mode of the special image is not changed. In other words, the case where the effect that suggests that the common effect is executed is called a suggestion effect, and the effect that suggests that either the success effect or the failure effect is executed (the common effect or the common effect is There is a case in which another effect is referred to as a suggestive effect.

The notice effect may be executed (started) before the player can determine (actually confirm) whether the notice effect or the content suggested by the notice effect is realized. For example, the notice effect that gives a notice or suggests to the player that the variable display state of the decorative pattern due to the winning of a certain game ball may reach the reach state is at least the variable display state of the decorative pattern due to the winning of the game ball. It may be executed (started) before reaching the reach state (or the non-reach state). In addition, the notice effect that gives a notice or suggests to the player that the variable display result due to the prize of a certain game ball may be a “big hit” is at least the fixed decorative pattern due to the prize of the game ball being stopped and displayed. May be executed (started) before.

The notice production may include a pre-read notice production (also referred to as “preliminary determination notice production”). The pre-reading notice effect determines whether or not the variable display result of the variable display is a "big hit" before starting the variable display subject to the notice based on the special game game hold information and the like ( This is a notice effect that is executed based on the judgment result. In the following description, the hold information that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect is referred to as target hold information, the first hold display corresponding to the target hold information is referred to as the target first hold display, and corresponds to the target hold information. The second hold display is referred to as the target second hold display, and the variable display corresponding to the target hold information is also referred to as the target variable display. In addition, the prefetch notice effect is executed when the target hold information is being consumed (when the target hold information is being consumed, including during variable display of the target), and when the hold information before the target hold information is executed. It may be executed while the information is being digested, or while the target's pending information is being digested, and while the pending information prior to the target's pending information is being digested.

A player can determine whether or not the content that the pre-reading notice effect will notice is realized after the winning of the game ball (after the start condition is satisfied) in the effect operation that becomes the pre-reading notice effect by winning the game ball. It may be executed (started) before that. For example, due to the winning of a certain game ball, the effect of the look-ahead notice effect for notifying (indicating) to the player beforehand that there is a possibility of reaching the reach state is at least variable in the decorative pattern depending on the prize of the game ball. It may be executed (started) before the display state becomes the reach state (or the non-reach state). In addition, at least the presentation operation of the pre-reading notice production for notifying (indicating) the player in advance that the variable display result due to the prize of a certain game ball may be a "big hit" It may be executed (started) before the fixed decorative pattern by is displayed in a stopped state.

The prefetch notice effect (preliminary determination notice effect) may be, for example, a hold change effect that changes the display mode of the first hold display in the first start prize winning memory display area 5HL, or a hold change effect in the first start prize winning memory display area 5HL. An action effect such as an on-hold change gasse effect that does not change the display mode of the 1-hold display may be prepared. The pre-reading notice effect (preliminary determination notice effect) may be, for example, a hold change effect that changes the display mode of the second hold display in the second start prize winning memory display area 5HR or a hold change effect in the second start prize winning memory display area 5HR. 2 An action effect such as an on-hold change gasse effect that does not change the display mode of the on-hold display may be prepared.

As a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, when the special symbol that is a lost symbol is stopped (derived), the variable display state of the decorative symbol is not changed to the reach state after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In some cases, a fixed decorative design that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display mode of the decorative pattern is called a "non-reach" (also called "normal loss") variable display mode when the variable display result is "miss".

As a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, when the special symbol that is the lost symbol is stopped (derived), the variable display state of the decorative symbol is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Correspondingly, after the reach effect is executed, the fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined reach-miss combination may be stopped and displayed. The variable display result of such a decorative pattern is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach loss”) when the variable display result is “miss”.

As a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, if the normal jackpot symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number “3” is stopped and displayed among the special symbols that are normally open round jackpot symbols, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is Corresponding to the reach state, after a predetermined reach effect is executed, etc., a fixed decoration that becomes a predetermined normal big hit combination (also referred to as "indeterminate variation big hit combination") among a plurality of kinds of big hit combinations The design is stopped and displayed. The predetermined normal jackpot combination is, for example, a normal pattern of the same type (also referred to as "non-probable variation pattern") on a predetermined effective line (for example, a straight line) formed by the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Is a combination in which the final stop is displayed together. An example of a normal design is, among the eight types of decorative designs with design numbers “1” to “8”, four types of decorative designs with even design numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8”. Is.

Corresponding to the fact that the fixed special symbol in the special drawing game becomes the normal big hit symbol, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, the fixed decorative symbol of the normal big hit combination is stopped and displayed. , Is called a variable display mode (also called "big hit type") of "indeterminate change" (also called "normal big hit") when the variable display result is "big hit". Based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit" in the "non-probable change" big hit type, the normal open big hit state is controlled, and after that, the time reduction control (time saving control) is performed.

By performing the time saving control, the variable display time of the special symbol in the special figure game (special figure change time) is shortened as compared with the normal state. The normal state is a normal game state different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state, and an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, initialization processing after power-on). The same control as in the state (1) is executed. In the time saving control, one of the condition that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the jackpot gaming state is ended and that the variable display result is “jackpot” is established first. Sometimes you just have to quit.

As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, among the special symbols that are normally open round jackpot symbols, when the probability variation jackpot symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is Corresponding to the reach state, after a reach effect similar to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative design is "normal" is executed, etc., a predetermined probability variable big hit combination among a plurality of kinds of big hit combinations There is a case where the fixed decorative pattern that is displayed is stopped. In other words, when the probability variation jackpot design is finally stopped and displayed in the special drawing game, the decoration design which is the predetermined probability variation jackpot combination is finally stopped, and the decoration pattern which is the predetermined normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. There are cases where it will be done. The predetermined probability variation big hit combination is, for example, a combination in which probability variation symbols of the same type are lined up on the activated line and finally stopped and displayed. An example of the probability variation pattern is, among the eight types of decorative patterns with the symbol numbers “1” to “8”, the four types of decorative symbols with the odd number “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”. Is.

Regardless of whether the fixed decorative design is a normal big hit combination or a probability variation big hit combination, the variable display mode in which the probability variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the special drawing game is a "big hit" variable display result. In this case, it is referred to as a variable display mode of "probability change" (also called "big hit type"). Based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit" in the "probable change" big hit type, the normal open big hit state is controlled, and after that, stochastic variation control (probability change control) is performed together with time saving control. By performing the probability variation control, the probability that the variable display result (special figure display result) is a "big hit" in each special figure game is improved to be higher than in the normal state. The probability variation control may be finished when the condition that the variable display result becomes "big hit" and the big hit game state is controlled again after the big hit game state ends. Like the time saving control, the probability variation control may be ended when the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the end of the big hit game state. In addition, the probability variation control may be terminated when it is determined that there is a probability variation fall, which terminates the probability variation control in the probability variation fall lottery executed each time the special figure game is started after the jackpot gaming state is finished. ..

When the time saving control is performed, the control for shortening the variation time of the regular symbol in the regular symbol game (normal symbol variation time) by the regular symbol display device 20 than in the normal state, and the variable of the regular symbol in each regular symbol game Control for improving the probability that the display result is "Public hit" compared to that in the normal state, tilt control of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 6B based on that the variable display result is "Public hit" In order to make it easier for the game ball to pass (enter) through the second start winning port, such as control for making the tilt control time for performing longer than in the normal state and control for increasing the number of tilts than in the normal state By increasing the possibility that the starting condition will be satisfied, control that is advantageous to the player is performed. In this way, the control that makes it easier for the player to enter the game ball into the second start winning port along with the time saving control is also referred to as high opening control. As the high opening control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed.

By performing the high opening control, the frequency of the second starting winning opening being in the expanded opening state is increased as compared with the case where the high opening control is not performed. Therefore, the second start condition for executing the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is likely to be established, and the second special figure game can be executed frequently. The time until it becomes a "big hit" is shortened. The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time saving control is performed.

The game state in which both the time saving control and the high opening control are performed is also called a time saving state or a high base state. The gaming state in which the probability variation control is performed is also referred to as a probability variation state or a highly accurate state. The gaming state in which the time saving control and the high opening control are performed together with the probability variation control is also referred to as a highly accurate high base state. The probability variation state in which only the probability variation control is performed and neither the time saving control nor the high opening control is performed is also referred to as a highly accurate low base state. It should be noted that only the gaming state in which the time saving control and the high opening control are performed together with the probability variation control may be referred to as a “probability variation state” in particular, and may be referred to as a time saving probability variation state in order to distinguish it from the highly accurate low base state. On the other hand, the certainty variation state in which only the certainty variation control is performed and neither the time saving control nor the high opening control is performed (highly accurate low base state) is sometimes referred to as the no time saving certainty variation state in order to distinguish it from the highly accurate high base state. The time saving state in which the time saving control or the high opening control is performed without performing the probability variation control is also referred to as a low accuracy high base state. The normal state in which neither the probability variation control, the time reduction control, nor the high opening control is performed is also referred to as a low accuracy low base state. When at least one of the time saving control and the probability variation control is performed in a game state other than the normal state, the special figure game (second special figure game) can be frequently executed, and each special figure game (first special figure game) is executed. By increasing the probability that the variable display result in the (drawing game, the second special drawing game) will be a “big hit”, it becomes an advantageous state for the player. A gaming state that is advantageous to the player and different from the jackpot gaming state is also called a special gaming state.

As a fixed special symbol in the special figure game, when a short-term open round big hit symbol such as a special symbol indicating the number "5" is stopped and displayed, or a small hit symbol such as a special symbol indicating the number "2" is stopped and displayed. In this case, the variable display state of the decorative design may not reach the reach state, and any one of a combination of a plurality of fixed decorative designs determined in advance as the opening opportunity may be stopped and displayed. Also, as a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, when the short-term open round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, a predetermined reach effect is executed in response to the variable display state of the decorative symbol being in the reach state. After a certain time, etc., the fixed decorative pattern which is a predetermined reach combination may be stopped and displayed.

In response to the fixed special symbol in the special drawing game becoming a short-term open round big hit symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which various fixed decorative symbols are stopped and displayed is when the variable display result is "big hit". It is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as a "big hit type") of "attack probability" (also referred to as "a sudden hit big hit" or "a sudden probability big hit"). Based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit" in the "hit" big hit type, the short-term open big hit state is controlled, and after the end, the time variation control and the probability variation control may be performed.

As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, a small hit symbol such as a special symbol indicating the number "2" is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result is "small hit", and the small hit game state is controlled. After the end, the game state is not changed, and the variable display result is continuously controlled to the game state before the "small hit". However, if the special drawing game in which the variable display result is "small hit" is executed and the number of executions of the special drawing game in the special game state has reached a predetermined number, after the small hit game state ends, The special game state may end and the normal state may occur.

The re-lottery effect may be executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern in which the fixed decorative pattern is the non-probable-variable big-hit combination or the probable-variable big-hit combination. For example, as a re-lottery effect, in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, after the decorative designs that are normally a big hit combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, the same decorative designs are changed again to be changed to a probability variation big hit combination. One of the decorative pattern (probably variable pattern) and the decorative pattern (normal pattern) that is usually a jackpot combination may be finally stopped and displayed as the fixed decorative pattern.

After the fixed decorative pattern which is usually a big jackpot combination is derived and displayed, the next round starts after one of the rounds ends in the jackpot gaming state at the start of the jackpot gaming state or during the execution of a round in the jackpot gaming state. During the period until the end of the last round in the big hit game state until the next variable display game starts, etc. The effect may be executed. The notification effect similar to the promotion effect during the big hit may be executed during the first variable display game after the end of the big hit game state. The jackpot mid-promotion production that is executed after the final round in the jackpot game state is sometimes called "ending promotion production".

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, a production control board 12, a sound control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 or the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is equipped with various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is mainly intended for a setting function of random numbers used in a special drawing game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and a sub-side control board including an effect control board 12 and the like. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 controls the lighting/extinguishing of each LED (for example, a segment LED) that constitutes the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Variable display of the predetermined identification information, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting/lighting/coloring of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a control function.

On the main board 11, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that captures detection signals from various switches for detecting a game ball and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 100, the game control microcomputer 100 The solenoid circuit 111 and the like for transmitting the solenoid drive signal of No. 1 to the solenoids 81 and 82 are mounted.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board that is independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and outputs the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the lamp. Various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electric parts such as 9 are mounted. That is, the performance control board 12 is an electrical component for performance such as a display operation in the image display device 5, a whole or a part of a sound output operation from the speaker 8, and a whole or a part of a lighting/extinguishing operation of the lamp 9 or the like. Is provided with a function of determining the control content for executing a predetermined effect operation.

The voice control board 13 is a control board for voice output control that is provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs audio from the speaker 8 based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. A processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control that is provided separately from the effect control board 12, and based on a command or control data from the effect control board 12, the lamp 9 or the like is turned on/off. It is equipped with a lamp driver circuit and so on.

As shown in FIG. 2, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 is connected to the main substrate 11. The gate switch 21, the first starting opening switch 22A, the second starting opening switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have arbitrary configurations such as those called a sensor that can detect a game ball as a game medium. If In addition to the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, and the count switch 23, the gaming machine 1 similarly has other switches (for example, a glass door (not shown) connected to the main board 11). ), a switch for detecting the open/closed state, a switch for detecting the open/closed state of the game board 2 itself, a switch for detecting unauthorized vibration, a switch for detecting unauthorized electromagnetic waves). Further, on the main substrate 11, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the ordinary symbol display device 20, the first holding display device 25A, the second holding display device 25B, the public figure holding display device 25C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

FIG. 3A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of EXT data is "0". Note that the command form shown in FIG. 3A is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals composing the control command may be one or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 3(A), the command 8001H is a first fluctuation start command that specifies fluctuation start in the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command that designates variation start in the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a variation pattern designating command that designates a variation pattern of the decorative design or the like that is variably displayed in each decorative design display area 5L, 5C, 5R corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special drawing game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 3B, different EXT data is obtained depending on the determination result of whether the variable display result is “miss” or “big hit” or the big hit type. Is set.

The command 8F00H is a symbol determination command for designating the final stop symbol in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set, for example, according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates display of an effect image showing the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a special winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the special winning opening to notify that it is a period during which the special winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command that designates display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set depending on the pre-determined result or the big hit type determination result, for example, by setting the EXT data similar to the variable display result notification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the EXT data to be set may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. In the special winning opening opening notification command and the special winning opening opening notification command, for example, different EXT data corresponding to the number of times the round is executed (for example, “1” to “15”) in the normal opening jackpot state or the short-term opening jackpot state. Is set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the first starting winning occurs, and thus the first special prize. It is a first start winning combination designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the first special figure game by the symbol display device 4A is satisfied.

The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the second starting winning is generated. It is the second start winning combination designation command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the second special drawing game by the special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command for notifying the first reserved figure reserved memory number in order to display the first reserved figure reserved memory number such that it can be specified in the first starting prize winning memory display area 5HL or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved memory number in order to display the special figure reserved memory number in the second starting prize winning memory display area 5HR or the like so as to be specified.

In the present embodiment, as the reserved storage information, a first starting mouth winning designation command and a second starting mouth winning designation command that specify whether the first starting winning opening has been won or the second starting winning opening has been won. Along with the transmission, a first reserved storage number notification command and a second reserved storage number notification command that specify the first special figure reserved storage number and the second special figure reserved storage number are also transmitted. It should be noted that when the number of reserved storages increases, the number of reserved storages addition designation command (first reserved storage count addition designation command or second designation (Reserved storage number addition designation command), while the number of reserved storages decreases, the reserved storage number subtraction designation command (first 1 reserved storage number subtraction designation command or second reserved storage number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted.

A total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted instead of the first reserved storage number notification command or the second reserved storage number notification command. Further, a total pending storage number addition designation command (total pending storage number subtraction designation command) for notifying the increase (or decrease) of the total pending storage number may be transmitted.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning time determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Among them, the command C4XXH is a symbol designating command showing the determination result of whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit” is there. Further, the command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating the determination result of the variation category (also referred to as “variation pattern type”) as the winning determination result. The variation category is a name when the variation patterns of decorative patterns are classified (aggregated) by type. In other words, the variation category is a group name of each group that includes variation patterns of one or more decorative patterns that are categorized into a common group.

In the present embodiment, in the winning random number determination process (see FIG. 15A), when the start winning occurs, the variable display result is determined as "big hit" based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. Whether or not it is determined to be a "small hit", and when it is determined to be a "big hit", the type of the big hit is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the variation category The variation category (variation pattern type) is determined based on the random number value MR3 for determination. Then, a value corresponding to the determination result is set in the EXT data of the symbol designating command or the variation category command, and the control is transmitted to the effect control board 12. The effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines whether or not the variable display result is determined to be "big hit" or "small hit" based on the value set in the symbol designating command and the big hit type. In addition to the recognition, the fluctuation category can be recognized based on the value set in the fluctuation category command.

The effect control commands such as the variation pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command are used when the effect control CPU 120 controls one or more effect devices (the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, etc.). Hereinafter, the effect control command used to control the image display operation in the image display device 5 is a display control command, the effect control command used to control the audio output from the speaker 8 is a voice control command, and the light emission operation of the lamp 9 ( The effect control command used to control the lighting operation, blinking operation, and extinguishing operation) is also referred to as a lamp control command. It should be noted that some of the effect control commands may be a display control command, a voice control command, and a lamp control command.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a program for game control to perform a control operation, and numerical data that indicates a random number value independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 for performing and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 are provided.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 to execute a process for controlling the progress of a game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101 for fixed data, the CPU 103 writes variable data in the RAM 102 for temporary storage, and the variable data write operation for storing temporary data in the RAM 102. Fluctuating data read operation of reading data, reception operation in which the CPU 103 receives various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I/O 105, and CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I/O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside is also performed.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random number values counted on the main substrate 11 side. As shown in FIG. 4, in the present embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, a random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, a random number value MR3 for determining the variation category, and a universal figure. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the display result and the random number value MR5 for determining the variation pattern are controlled to be countable. A random number value other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. The random number used to control the progress of such a game is also called a game random number.

The random number circuit 104 may be any one that counts numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR5. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of MR5 may be counted.

Next, the variation pattern of the decorative design will be described. Hereinafter, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" is referred to as "loss variation pattern". The loss variation pattern corresponds to the "non-reach variation pattern ("non-reach variation pattern" "non-reach" when the variable display result of the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach". (Also referred to as "(miss) variation pattern")" or "variable display result is "miss", and the "reach variation pattern" ("reach loss variation pattern") corresponding to the variable display mode of the decorative pattern being "reach" Also referred to as “)”.

A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "big hit" or "small hit" is referred to as a "hit variation pattern". The hit variation pattern includes a “big hit variation pattern” corresponding to the variable display result being “big hit” and a “small hit variation pattern” corresponding to the variable display result being “small hit”. As the jackpot variation pattern, a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to each jackpot type may be prepared.

In the non-reach variation pattern, a plurality of variation patterns with different variation times are prepared corresponding to the time saving control executed when the total number of pending memories is large, or when the game state is the probability variation state or the time reduction state. Good. As a result, by selecting one of the variation patterns according to the total number of pending storages and the gaming state, it is possible to control the variation time according to the total number of pending storages and the gaming state.

For the variation patterns including the reach effect such as the big hit variation pattern and the reach variation pattern, the variation patterns corresponding to the reach modes of the respective reach effects are prepared. A variation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach is executed is referred to as a “normal reach variation pattern”, and a variation pattern in which the reach effect of super reach is performed is referred to as a “super reach variation pattern”.

FIG. 5 shows a specific example of the fluctuation category and the fluctuation pattern in this embodiment. In FIG. 5, the variation category “PA1” is a shortened/non-reach (miss) variation category. The variation pattern “PA1-1” belongs to the variation category “PA1”. The variation category “PA2” is a non-reach (miss) variation category. The fluctuation patterns “PA2-1” to “PA2-3” belong to the fluctuation category “PA2”. The variation category “PA3” is a normal reach (miss) variation category. The fluctuation patterns “PA3-1” and “PA3-2” belong to the fluctuation category “PA3”. The variation category “PA4” is a super reach α (miss) variation category. Variation patterns “PA4-1” to “PA4-4” belong to the variation category “PA4”. The variation category “PA5” is a super reach β (miss) variation category. The fluctuation patterns “PA5-1” to “PA5-4” belong to the fluctuation category “PA5”. The variation category “PB3” is a normal reach (big hit) variation category. The fluctuation patterns “PB3-1” and “PB3-2” belong to the fluctuation category “PB3”. The variation category “PB4” is a super reach α (big hit) variation category. The fluctuation patterns “PB4-1” to “PB4-4” belong to the fluctuation category “PB4”. The variation category “PB5” is a super reach β (big hit) variation category. The fluctuation patterns “PB5-1” to “PB5-4” belong to the fluctuation category “PB5”.

The variation pattern “PA2-1” belonging to the variation category “PA2” is a non-reach (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length as non-reach (loss). The variation pattern “PA2-2” is a non-reach (miss) variation pattern in which the sliding effect is executed. The special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-2” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1” because the sliding effect is executed. The same applies to other variation patterns in which the sliding effect is executed. The variation pattern “PA2-3” is a non-reach (miss) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. The special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-3” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1” because the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed. The same applies to other variation patterns in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed. The variation pattern “PA1-1” belonging to the variation category “PA1” is a non-reach (miss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is shorter than the variation pattern “PA2-1”.

The variation pattern “PA3-1” belonging to the variation category “PA3” is a normal reach (loss) variation pattern in which the special map variation time is a normal length as a normal reach (loss). Further, the variation pattern “PA3-2” is a normal reach (miss) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PA4-1” belonging to the variation category “PA4” is a super reach α (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is normally long as the super reach α (loss). The variation pattern “PA4-2” is a super reach α (loss) variation pattern in which pseudo-continuous variation (effect) is executed as a guise. The special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PA4-2" is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PA4-1" because the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a guise. The same applies to other variation patterns in which pseudo-repeated variation (effect) is executed as a fake. The variation pattern “PA4-3” is a super reach α (loss) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. Further, the variation pattern “PA4-4” is a super reach α (loss) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed twice.

The variation pattern “PA5-1” belonging to the variation category “PA5” is a super reach β (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is normally long as the super reach β (loss). The variation pattern “PA5-2” is a super reach β (loss) variation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous variation (effect) is executed as a fake. The variation pattern “PA5-3” is a super reach β (loss) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. Further, the variation pattern “PA5-4” is a super reach β (loss) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed twice.

The fluctuation pattern "PB3-1" belonging to the fluctuation category "PB3" is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as a normal reach (big hit). In addition, the variation pattern “PB3-2” is a normal reach (big hit) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PB4-1” belonging to the variation category “PB4” is a super-reach α (big hit) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is normally long as super-reach α (big hit). The fluctuation pattern “PB4-2” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-repeated fluctuations (effects) are executed as a guise. The variation pattern “PB4-3” is a super reach α (big hit) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. Further, the variation pattern “PB4-4” is a super reach α (big hit) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed twice.

The fluctuation pattern "PB5-1" belonging to the fluctuation category "PB5" is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is normally long as super reach β (big hit). The fluctuation pattern “PB5-2” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-repeated fluctuations (effects) are executed as a guise. The variation pattern “PB5-3” is a super reach β (big hit) variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous variation (effect) is executed once. Further, the variation pattern “PB5-4” is a super reach β (big hit) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed twice.

It should be noted that, in FIG. 5, description of the variation pattern when the big hit type of the small hit variation pattern and the big hit variation pattern is abrupt is omitted, but the loss variation pattern (non-reach variation pattern, Reach loss variation pattern) and the big hit variation pattern (except when the big hit type is abrupt).

In the ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2, various data used for controlling the progress of the game are stored in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, etc. prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, in the ROM 101, data (for example, information specifying the content of the control command) forming a plurality of command tables used by the CPU 103 to transmit control signals which are various control commands from the main board 11, and a diagram. Data and the like forming a table as shown in FIG. 5 are stored.

FIG. 6 shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, as the special figure display result determination table, a first special figure display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. 6A and a second special figure display result determination table 130B shown in FIG. It is prepared. In the first special symbol display result determination table 130A, a fixed special symbol which is a variable display result in the first special symbol game (special symbol game using the first special symbol) by the first special symbol display device 4A is derived and displayed. Previously, whether to control the variable display result as a "big hit" in the big hit game state, or whether to control the variable display result as a "small hit" in the small hit game state, for determining the special figure display result 2 is a table referred to for making a decision based on the random number value MR1 of In the second special symbol display result determination table 130B, a fixed special symbol that is a variable display result in the second special symbol game (special symbol game using the second special symbol) by the second special symbol display device 4B is derived and displayed. Previously, whether to control the variable display result as a "big hit" in the big hit game state, or whether to control the variable display result as a "small hit" in the small hit game state, for determining the special figure display result 2 is a table that is referred to in order to make a decision based on the random number value MR1.

In the first special figure display result determination table 130A, the special figure is displayed depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the time saving state (low certainty state), or the certainty changed state (high certainty state). The numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for result determination is assigned to the special figure display results of "big hit", "small hit", and "miss". In the second special figure display result determination table 130B, the random state for determining the special figure display result is determined depending on whether the game state is the normal state, the time saving state (low certainty state) or the certainty changed state (high certainty state). The numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the numerical value MR1 is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "miss".

In each of the first special figure display result determination table 130A and the second special figure display result determination table 130B, when the game state is the definite change state (high accuracy state), it is the normal state or the time saving state (low accuracy state). More decision values are assigned to the special jackpot display result of "big hit" than when. Thereby, in the probability variation state (high accuracy state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, as compared to the normal state or the time saving state (low accuracy state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and the big hit game is played. The probability of being determined to control the state increases.

In the setting example of the first special figure display result determination table 130A, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "30000" to "30350") are assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". On the other hand, in the setting example of the second special figure display result determination table 130B, the decided value is not assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". With such a setting, a "small hit" does not occur in the second special figure game, so that the normal variable winning ball device 6B is formed, for example, in a time saving state (low accurate high base state) or a positive change state (high accurate high base state). It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a “small hit” where it is difficult to obtain a prize ball in a game state where the game ball easily enters the second start winning hole, and to prevent the deterioration of the game interest due to the extension of the game. ..

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table 130B and the first special figure display result determination table 130A, different predetermined range determination values may be assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". For example, in the second special figure display result determination table 130B, a smaller determination value than in the first special figure display result determination table 130A may be assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". As a result, it is possible to avoid frequent occurrence of "small hit" in the gaming state in which the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B. Alternatively, the special figure display result may be determined by referring to a common special figure display result determination table for the first special figure game and the second special figure game.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table 131 determines the jackpot type to any of a plurality of types on the basis of the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined to control the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "jackpot". It is a table referred to for. In the jackpot type determination table 131, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A (special symbol game using the first special symbol) is executed, or the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The numerical value (determined value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type depends on whether the (special figure game using the second special figure) is executed. Is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table 131, when the first special figure game is executed, that is, when the special figure to be changed (also referred to as a variable special figure) is the first special figure, the determined value of the predetermined range ( (Values in the range of “82” to “99”) are assigned to the jackpot type “probability”, on the other hand, when the second special figure game is executed, if the variable special figure is the second special figure, No decision value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability". With such a setting, since it is not “probable” in the second special figure game, it is possible to obtain a prize ball in a game state in which the game ball easily enters the second start winning hole formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of difficult “probability” and prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to the extension of the game.

Note that different predetermined range determination values may be assigned to jackpot types of "probability" depending on whether the variation special map is the first special figure or the second variation special figure. For example, when the variation special map is the second special figure, a smaller determination value than that in the case where the variation special figure is the first special figure may be assigned to the jackpot type “probability”. As a result, it is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of "probability" in the gaming state in which the game ball easily enters the second start winning hole formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B. Alternatively, the big hit type may be determined by referring to common table data when the variation special map is the first special figure and the second special figure.

Further, the ROM 101 stores a variation category determination table that is referred to when determining the variation category to be one of a plurality of types. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation category determination tables in which the types of variation categories that can be determined in the variation category determination table, the respective determination rates, and the like are different from each other. In the variation category determination table, a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation category is assigned to each variation category. That is, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation category determination tables having different determination values (for example, the range of the determination value and the number of determination values) assigned to at least one variation category of the plurality of types of variation categories. There is. Note that, instead of the plurality of variation category determination tables, one large variation category determination table including information of all variation category determination tables may be stored in the ROM 101.

Further, the ROM 101 stores a fluctuation pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine the fluctuation pattern to be one of a plurality of types. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation pattern determination tables that differ from each other in the types of variation patterns that can be determined in the variation pattern determination table, the respective determination rates, and the like. In the fluctuation pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR5 for fluctuation pattern determination is assigned to each fluctuation pattern. That is, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation pattern determination tables that have different determination values (for example, the range of the determination value and the number of determination values) assigned to at least one of the plurality of types of variation patterns. There is. Instead of the plurality of fluctuation pattern determination tables, one large fluctuation pattern determination table including the information of each fluctuation pattern determination table may be stored in the ROM 101.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM that is partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). It In particular, at least the data according to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. Data according to the control state of the game control means, when the power is restored after the occurrence of a power outage, etc., the data necessary to restore the control state before the occurrence of a power outage (for example, a special figure Process flag, etc.). Further, data according to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 8, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling progress of a game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. There is. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 8 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 151B, a general figure reservation storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game. The control timer setting unit 153, the game control counter setting unit 154, and the game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 151A is a special figure game in which the game balls have passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A and the first starting winning has occurred, but the game has not yet started ( Hold data (first special figure hold information) of the first special figure game) by the first special symbol display device 4A is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates a winning number (a game ball detection order) into the first start winning hole with a reservation number, and a random number is generated by the CPU 103 based on the passage (entry) of the game ball. Numerical data and the like indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 and the like are stored as reservation data (first special figure reservation information) until the number of storage reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The second special figure reservation storage unit 151B is a special figure game in which the game ball has passed (entered) through the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B and the second starting winning has occurred, but has not yet started. Hold data (second special figure hold information) of (second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B associates a winning number into the second start winning opening (detection order of game balls) with a holding number, and a random number is generated by the CPU 103 based on the passage (entry) of the game ball. Numerical data or the like indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 or the like is stored as reservation data (second special figure reservation information) until the number of storage reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

In addition, the holding data of the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A (first special figure hold information based on the establishment of the first start condition), and the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B The hold data (the second special figure hold information based on the establishment of the second start winning) may be stored in a common hold storage unit in association with the hold number.

The general figure reservation storage unit 151C stores the reservation data regarding the general figure game which has not yet been started by the ordinary symbol display device 20 (general figure reservation, although the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21). Information). For example, the public figure reservation storage unit 151C is associated with the reservation numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed through the passage gate 41, and based on the passage of the game balls, the CPU 103 extracts the general figure display result determined from the random number circuit 104 or the like. Numerical data or the like indicating the random number MR4 for use as reservation data (universal figure reservation information) is stored until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores, for each of the plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state.

The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating a timer value for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count value used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, in the game control counter setting unit 154, the first reserved storage number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter for counting the first special diagram reserved storage number, and the second special figure reserved storage number. The second pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter for counting, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number, and the like, Remembered.

The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The I/O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 is an input port for receiving various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100 and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmitting.

As shown in FIG. 2, the production control board 12 is provided with a production control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores a production control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area of the production control CPU 120. RAM 122, a display control unit 123 that executes a process for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and a random number that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the effect control CPU 120. A circuit 124 and an I/O 125 are mounted.

As an example, in the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 121, whereby processing for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric components is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads a fixed data from the ROM 121, a fixed data read operation, the effect control CPU 120 writes various variable data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores the variable data, and the effect control CPU 120 RAM 122. The variable data reading operation of reading various kinds of variation data temporarily stored in the production control CPU 120 for receiving the various signals input from the outside of the production control board 12 via the I/O 125, and the production control CPU 120. A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the production control board 12 via the I/O 125 is also performed.

The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

To the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting an information signal (video signal) indicating an effect image to the image display device 5 and for transmitting an information signal (effect sound signal) indicating an instruction to the sound control board 13 are transmitted. Wiring, wiring for transmitting an information signal (illumination signal) indicating a command to the lamp control board 14, and the like are connected. Furthermore, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the operation operation of the player to the stick controller 31A is detected from the controller sensor unit 35A, and a game to the push button 31B. A wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that an operation action of a person is detected from the push sensor 35B is also connected.

In the effect control board 12, for example, by the random number circuit 124 or the like, the numerical value data indicating various random number values used for controlling the effect operation are updatable counted. The random number used to control such a production operation is also referred to as a production random number.

In the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2, various data used for controlling the progress of the game are stored in addition to the program for effect control. For example, the ROM 121 stores data that configures a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, and the like prepared for the production control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings.

For example, the ROM 121 stores a pending display mode determination table that is referred to in order to determine the display mode of the first pending display displayed in the first starting prize winning storage display area 5HL to any one of a plurality of types. There is. Specifically, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of pending display mode determination tables that differ from each other in the types of display modes that can be determined in the pending display mode determination table, the respective determination rates, and the like. In the hold display mode determination table, a numerical value (decision value) that is compared with a random number value MR6 (not shown) for determining the display mode of the first hold display is assigned to each display mode of the first hold display. .. Instead of the plurality of hold display mode determination tables, one large hold display mode determination table including information of all the hold display mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

Further, for example, the ROM 121 stores a hold display mode determination table that is referred to in order to determine the display mode of the second hold display displayed in the second start prize winning storage display area 5HR to any one of a plurality of types. Has been done. Specifically, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of pending display mode determination tables that differ from each other in the types of display modes that can be determined in the pending display mode determination table, the respective determination rates, and the like. In the hold display mode determination table, a numerical value (decision value) that is compared with a random number value MR6 (not shown) for determining the display mode of the second hold display is assigned to each display mode of the second hold display. .. Instead of the plurality of hold display mode determination tables, one large hold display mode determination table including information of all the hold display mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

Further, the ROM 121 stores a holding effect execution presence/absence determination table that is referred to for determining whether or not to execute a holding effect (also referred to as an action effect or an on-hold change effect). Specifically, in the hold effect execution presence/absence determination table, a numerical value (decision value) that is compared with a random number value MR7 (not shown) for determining presence/absence of execution of the hold effect is determined whether the hold effect is executed or not. It is assigned. In the present embodiment, the hold effect is displayed in the second start winning a prize memory display area 5HR and the pre-reading notice effect that changes the display mode of the hold display displayed in the first start award winning memory display area 5HL to the notice mode. And a look-ahead notice effect that changes the display mode of the pending display to a notice mode. There are a plurality of types of hold effects, and there is also a hold change effect in which a character or the like acts on the hold display in the display area of the image display device 5 to change the display mode of the hold display. In the hold change effect, there is a hold change effect effect in which a character or the like acts on the hold display in the display area of the image display device 5, but does not change the display mode of the hold display.

Further, the ROM 121 stores an active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute an active display change effect (success effect) that changes a special image including active display. Specifically, the active display change execution presence/absence determination table is compared with a random value MR7 (not shown) for determining whether or not the active display change effect is executed, whether the active display change effect is executed or not. A numerical value (decision value) is assigned.

In the present embodiment, the active display change effect is an effect (main notice effect) of changing the special image to a notice mode. In other words, the active display, the active display frame surrounding the active display, the information corresponding to the active display (for example, the active display or the characters and images displayed around the active display frame, the active display frame, etc.) are used as the notice mode. It is a production (main announcement production) to be changed. As described above, in the active display change effect, the common effect, the success effect executed when changing the special image after executing the common effect (also referred to as active display change effect), and the common effect are executed. A failure effect (also referred to as an active display change gaze effect) that is executed later when the special image is not changed is included. The success effect is an effect that acts on the special image in the display area of the image display device 5 to change the display mode of the special image. On the other hand, the failure effect is an effect that does not change the display mode of the special image by not affecting the special image in the display area of the image display device 5, or a special effect that affects the special image in the display area of the image display device 5. It is an effect that does not change the display mode.

Further, the active display change effect includes a first system change effect that changes the special image mode to any one of a plurality of modes and a special image mode that changes the second system. And the 2nd system change production which changes in any one of a plurality of modes is included. The first system change effect includes a common effect, a success effect, and a failure effect corresponding to the first system change effect, and the second system change effect corresponds to the second system change effect. , Common effects, success effects, and failure effects exist. In the present embodiment, the first system change effect is an effect that changes the display mode of the active display (active display displayed as a special image) in the special image, and the second system change effect is the special image in the special image. The effect is to change the display mode of the active display frame (active display frame displayed as a special image).

Further, the ROM 121 refers to the first system change which is referred to for determining the execution timing of the first system change effect, which is one of the active display change effects (which timing in the variation, etc.). A performance execution timing determination table is stored. In the first system change effect, the rate at which the successful effect related to the first system change effect is executed varies depending on the execution timing of the first system change effect. Further, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of effect execution timing determination tables for the first system change effect, which are different from each other in the types of execution timings that can be determined in the execution timing determination table of the first system change effect, the respective determination rates, and the like. It may be. In this execution timing determination table of the first system change effect, a numerical value (decision value) that is compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the first system change effect is assigned to each execution timing. There is. Further, instead of the execution timing determination tables of the plurality of first system change effects, one large first system change effect execution timing determination table including the information of all the first system change effect execution timing determination tables is stored in the ROM 121. May be stored.

Further, the ROM 121 refers to the second system change referred to for determining the execution timing (the timing of execution of the second system change effect) which is one of the active display change effects. A performance execution timing determination table is stored. In the second system change effect, the rate at which the successful effect related to the second system change effect is executed varies depending on the execution timing of the second system change effect. Further, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of performance execution timing determination tables for the second system change effect, which are different from each other in the types of execution timings that can be determined in the execution timing determination table of the second system change effect, the respective determination rates, and the like. It may be. In the execution timing determination table of the second system change effect, a numerical value (decision value) that is compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the second system change effect is assigned to each execution timing. There is. Further, in place of the plurality of second system change effect execution timing determination tables, one large second system change effect execution timing determination table including information of all the second system change effect execution timing determination tables is stored in the ROM 121. May be stored.

It should be noted that the ROM 121 includes a plurality of first system changes in which the types of execution timings that can be determined in the execution timing determination table for the first system change effect and the execution timing determination table for the second system change effect, the respective determination rates, and the like are different from each other. The effect execution timing determination table of the effect and the execution timing determination table of the second system change effect may be stored as one large active display change effect execution timing determination table. In the execution timing determination table of the active display change effect, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the first system change effect, and the second system, for each execution timing. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining execution timing of the change effect, or a random value (not shown) for determining execution timing of both the first system change effect and the second system change effect A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with may be assigned. Further, instead of the execution timing determination tables of the plurality of active display change effects, one large active display change effect execution timing determination table including information of the execution timing determination tables of all the active display change effects is stored in the ROM 121. Good.

In addition, the ROM 121 stores an active display change effect pattern determination table that is referred to for determining the effect pattern (effect mode) of the active display change effect to one of a plurality of types. Specifically, in the effect pattern determination table of the active display change effect stored in the ROM 121, a random number value (not shown) for determining the effect pattern of the active display change effect for each effect pattern of the active display change effect. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with is assigned.

It should be noted that the ROM 121 may store a hold change effect execution timing determination table that is referred to in order to determine the execution timing of the hold change effect (timing of how many times the change is executed). Further, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of hold change effect execution timing determination tables in which types of execution timings that can be determined in the hold change effect execution timing determination table, respective determination rates, and the like are different from each other. In this hold change effect execution timing determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the hold change effect may be assigned to each execution timing. Further, instead of the plurality of hold change effect execution timing determination tables, one large hold change effect execution timing determination table including information of all hold change effect execution timing determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

It should be noted that the ROM 121 stores a main notice effect pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of effect patterns (effect modes) of other main notice effects of the above-mentioned active display change effect. May be. In this case, specifically, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of main notice effect pattern determination tables in which the types of main notice effect patterns that can be determined in the main notice effect pattern determination table, the respective determination rates, and the like are different from each other. The main notice effect pattern determination table may be assigned a numerical value (decision value) that is compared with the random number value MR9 (not shown) for determining the main notice effect pattern for each of the main notice effect patterns. Note that, instead of the plurality of main notice production pattern determination tables, one large main notice production pattern determination table including information of all the main notice production pattern determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

It should be noted that the ROM 121 may store a hold change effect pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of effect patterns (effect modes) of the hold change effect. In this case, in the ROM 121, in the hold change effect pattern determination table, if each hold change effect pattern is assigned a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the hold change effect pattern. Good.

It should be noted that the ROM 121 may store a holding change gasse effect execution presence/absence determination table that is referred to for determining whether to execute the hold change gasse effect. In this case, in the hold change gasse effect execution presence/absence determination table, a numerical value (not shown) that is compared with a random value (not shown) for determining whether or not the hold change gasse effect is executed is determined whether or not the hold change gasse effect is executed. A decision value) may be assigned.

It should be noted that the ROM 121 may store a hold change gasse effect execution timing determination table that is referred to in order to determine the execution timing of the hold change gasse effect (timing such as how many times the change is executed). In this case, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of hold change gasse effect execution timing determination tables that differ from each other in the types of execution timings that can be determined in the hold change gasse effect execution timing determination table, the respective determination ratios, and the like. A numerical value (determined value) that is compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the pending change gasse effect may be assigned to each execution timing in the pending change gasse effect execution timing determination table. It should be noted that, instead of the plurality of hold change gasse effect execution timing determination tables, one large hold change gasse effect execution timing determination table including information of all the hold change gasse effect execution timing determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

It should be noted that the ROM 121 may store a hold change gasse effect pattern determination table that is referred to for determining the effect pattern (effect form) of the hold change gasse effect to one of a plurality of types. In this case, in the ROM 121, in the hold change gasse effect pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the hold change gasse effect pattern is stored in each of the hold change gasse effect pattern. It may be assigned.

In addition, the ROM 121 also includes an active display mode determination table (also referred to as a “digest display mode determination table”) that is referred to for determining the display mode of the active display displayed in the active display area AHA to one of a plurality of types. (Referred to) may be stored. In this case, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of active display display mode determination tables that differ from each other in the types of display modes that can be determined in the active display display mode determination table, the respective determination rates, and the like. In the display mode determination table of active display, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the display mode of active display may be assigned to each display mode of active display. That is, in the ROM 121, a plurality of active display display modes in which the above-described determined values (for example, the range or the number of determined values) assigned to at least one display mode among a plurality of types of active display are different from each other A decision table may be stored. Instead of the display mode determination tables of the plurality of active displays, one large active display mode determination table including the information of all active display mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

Further, in the ROM 121, a plurality of effect control patterns used by the effect control CPU 120 for controlling effect operations by various effect devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, the effect model, etc.) are configured. Data and the like to be stored. By setting the effect control pattern, various variable display operations such as a decorative pattern and advance notice effects (including prefetch advance notice effects) are realized.

The various effect control patterns are composed of data showing the control contents of various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the effect control pattern corresponds to a plurality of types of variation patterns, in the period from the start of variation of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the definite display of the fixed special symbol that is the special symbol display result is displayed. Variable display operation of symbols, reach effects, re-lottery effects, etc., or various effect operations not accompanied by variable display of decorative symbols (for example, hold for display mode of hold display in first start winning prize memory display area 5HL) Effect, and hold effect for the display mode of the hold display in the second start winning prize memory display area 5HR), and the like, and the like, and the like, which are configured by data indicating the control contents of various effect operations.

FIG. 9A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. The production control pattern is composed of control data for controlling various production operations such as production control process timer judgment value, display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and end code. It suffices to set the contents of various kinds of effect control, the switching timing of effect control, etc. in series. In addition, the effect control pattern may include, for example, movable member control data that specifies the content of operation control of a movable member provided inside or outside the game area. The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) that is compared with the value of the effect control process timer (effect control process timer value) provided in a predetermined area of the effect control RAM built in the effect control CPU 120. Therefore, the determination value corresponding to the execution time (effect time) of each effect operation is set in advance. Instead of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 11, or a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control CPU 120. As described above, data indicating the switching timing of effect control may be set in correspondence with the predetermined control content and processing content.

The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the display control data is data that specifies the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5. The voice control data includes, for example, data indicating a voice output mode from the speaker 8, such as data indicating an output mode of effect sound or the like linked to the variable display operation of the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the voice control data is data that specifies the voice output operation from the speaker 8. The lamp control data includes, for example, data indicating the light emitting operation mode of the lamp 9 (light emitter). That is, the lamp control data is data that specifies the light emitting operation (lighting operation, blinking operation, extinguishing operation) of the lamp 9. The operation detection control data includes, for example, data indicating the period during which an operation on the operation unit such as the operation button 30 is effectively detected, the control content of the effect operation when the operation is effectively detected, and the like. That is, the operation detection control data is data that specifies the effect operation according to the operation on the operation unit. It should be noted that these control data need not be included in all the effect control patterns, but an effect control pattern configured to include some control data according to the content of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be

Drawing 9 (B) is a figure for explaining various production operation performed according to the contents of a production control pattern. The effect control CPU 120 determines the control content of the effect operation according to various control data included in the effect control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches any of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination value, and the character is displayed. Control is performed to display an effect image such as an image or a background image on the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, the control for outputting the sound from the speaker 8 in the mode specified by the voice control data is performed, and the control for causing the lamp 9 to emit light in the mode specified by the lamp control data is performed, and the operation specified by the operation detection control data is performed. During the effective period, control for accepting an operation on the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B and determining effect contents is performed. It should be noted that dummy data (data that does not specify control) may be set in the data corresponding to the effect parts that are not controlled even though they correspond to the effect control process timer determination value.

The production operation shown in FIG. 9(B) corresponds to the entire period from the start to the final stop of the variation of the decorative design, but the present invention is not limited to this, and during the variable display of the decorative design. An effect control pattern for executing the effect operation may be provided corresponding to a part of the period (for example, the period for performing the notice effect). Alternatively, in order to execute the production operation corresponding to a predetermined period other than the variable display of the decorative pattern (for example, a period during which a round is being executed in the big hit game state, a period in which an ending effect is executed at the end of the big hit game state, etc.) Effect control pattern may be provided.

When setting the effect control pattern, the pattern data forming the applicable effect control pattern may be read from the ROM 121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. The ROM 121 of the pattern data forming the applicable effect control pattern may be read. The storage address in 1 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 and the read position of the storage data in the ROM 121 may be designated. After that, each time the performance control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the performance control process timer determination values, and if it matches, the performance operation according to the corresponding various control data. Control. In this way, the effect control CPU 120, according to the contents of the process data #1 to the process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern, the effect device (image display device 5, speaker 8, lamp 9, Control of movable members etc. included in the production model is advanced. In each process data #1 to process data #n, display control data #1 to display control data #n and voice control data #1 to voice control associated with the effect control process timer determination values #1 to #n. Data #n, lamp control data #1 to lamp control data #n, and operation detection control data #1 to operation detection control data #n show the control contents of the effect operation in the effect device and specify the execution of effect control. Control execution data #1 to effect control execution data #n are configured.

A command according to the effect control pattern thus set is output from the effect control CPU 120 to the display control unit 123, the sound control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. In the display control unit 123 that receives the command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like reads out the image data indicated by the command from an image data memory such as a CGROM and temporarily stores it in the VRAM for expansion. Further, in the voice control board 13 that receives the command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, the voice synthesizing IC reads the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores it in the voice RAM or the like to develop the voice data. ..

In the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2, an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 10A, for example, is provided as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. Is provided. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 10(A) includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194. There is.

The effect control flag setting unit 191 has a plurality of types in which the state can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the effect image display state on the screen of the image display device 5 or the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores, for each of the plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state.

The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the operation of displaying effect images on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating a timer value for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the present embodiment, data forming the first start-up winning prize reception command buffer 194A as shown in FIG. 10B is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The first start prize-winning reception command buffer 194A is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value of the total number of reserved memories (eg, “4”). .. When there is a start winning prize to the first start winning a prize mouth, a starting mouth winning designation command (first starting mouth winning designation command), a symbol designating command, a variable category command, a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command) 4) is set as one set and transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the first start winning prize reception command buffer 194A, of these commands, a storage area is secured so that the symbol designating command, the variation category command, and the first reserved storage number notification command can be stored in association with each other.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the commands from the beginning in the empty area of the first start prize-winning reception command buffer 194A in the order received at the first start prize. At the time of the first start winning, the command transmission is performed in the order of the first starting winning award designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the first reserved storage number notification command. Therefore, if the command reception is normally performed, as shown in FIG. 10B, in the storage area corresponding to each of the buffer numbers “1” to “4”, the starting mouth winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the fluctuation The category command and the first reserved storage number notification command are stored in this order. In FIG. 10B, the commands are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “3”.

The commands stored in the first start prize-winning reception command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 10B are deleted one by one each time the variable display of the decorative design is started in synchronization with the first special figure game, Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (winning order of commands). Specifically, when the variable display of the decorative design is started in synchronization with the first special figure game, the variable is stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number of the commands associated with the first starting opening winning award designation command. One deleted command (one set) is deleted, and the command is stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (the command associated with the first start mouth prize designation command). However, it is shifted while maintaining the winning order (the relationship of the buffer numbers).

For example, when the variable display of the decorative design is started in synchronization with the first special drawing game in the storage state shown in FIG. 10B, the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “1” is deleted. , The command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the buffer number “1”, and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “3” becomes the buffer number “2”. Be shifted.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the data forming the second start-up winning command buffer 194B as shown in FIG. 10C is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The second start prize-winning reception command buffer 194B is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value of the total number of reserved memories (eg, “4”). .. When there is a starting winning prize to the second starting winning a prize mouth, a starting mouth winning designation command (second starting mouth winning designation command), a symbol designating command, a variable category command, a reserved storage number notification command (a second reserved storage number notification command) 4) is set as one set and transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the second start winning award reception command buffer 194B, a storage area is secured so that a symbol designating command, a variation category command, and a reserved storage number notification command among these commands can be stored in association with each other.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the commands from the beginning in the empty area of the second start winning combination reception command buffer 194B in the order received at the second starting winning combination. At the time of the second start prize, the command transmission is performed in the order of the second start mouth prize designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the reserved storage number notification command. Therefore, if the command is normally received, as shown in FIG. 10C, in the storage area corresponding to each of the buffer numbers “1” to “4”, the second start mouth winning designation command, the symbol designation command , The variable category command, and the pending storage number notification command are stored in this order. In FIG. 10C, commands are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “2”.

The commands stored in the second start prize-winning reception command buffer 194B shown in FIG. 10C are deleted one by one each time the variable display of the decorative design is started in synchronization with the second special figure game, Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (winning order of commands). Specifically, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started in synchronization with the second special figure game, it is stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number of the commands associated with the second starting opening winning award designation command. One deleted command (one set) is deleted, and the command is stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (the command associated with the second start mouth winning award designation command). However, it is shifted while maintaining the winning order (the relationship of the buffer numbers).

For example, when the variable display of the decorative design is started in synchronization with the second special figure game in the storage state shown in FIG. 10C, the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “1” is deleted. , The command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the buffer number “1”.

Further, in the present embodiment, data forming the first prefetching notice buffer 194C as shown in FIG. 10D is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The first look-ahead notice buffer 194C is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1" to "4") corresponding to each data forming the first start prize-winning reception command buffer 194A. That is, the first pre-reading notice buffer 194C stores the determination contents regarding the pre-reading notice production regarding the respective hold information determined by the production control CPU 120 and the like in association with the buffer numbers "1" to "4". R. When the pending data (1 set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the first start-up winning command buffer 194A of FIG. 10B due to the start of variable display of the decorative pattern, etc. The contents associated with the buffer number are also deleted in the 1-read-ahead notice buffer 194C. In addition, due to the start of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reserved data (1 set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is received in another buffer number in the first start winning prize reception command buffer 194A of FIG. 10B. When it is shifted to, the contents associated with the buffer number in the first prefetching notice buffer 194C are also shifted to the other buffer number.

In addition, in the present embodiment, data forming the second prefetching notice buffer 194D as shown in FIG. 10E is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The second prefetching notice buffer 194D is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1" to "4") corresponding to each data forming the second start winning award reception command buffer 194B. That is, the second pre-reading notice buffer 194D stores the determination contents regarding the pre-reading notice production related to the respective holding information determined by the production control CPU 120 and the like in association with the buffer numbers "1" to "4". R. When the hold data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the second start winning prize reception command buffer 194B of FIG. 10C due to the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, 2 In the prefetch notice buffer 194D, the contents associated with the buffer number are also deleted. Also, due to the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, etc., the reserved data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is received in another buffer number in the second start winning prize reception command buffer 194B of FIG. 10C. When it is shifted to, the contents associated with the buffer number in the second prefetching notice buffer 194D are also shifted to the other buffer number.

Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing which is game control main processing. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 makes necessary initialization after setting interrupt prohibition. In this initial setting, the RAM 102 is cleared, for example. In addition, register setting of CTC (counter/timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, the interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process. When the initial setting is completed, the interrupt is permitted and then the loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed and then the loop process may be started.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, and thereby the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, and the second starting port via the switch circuit 110. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S11). Hereinafter, step S will be simply referred to as S. Then, by executing a predetermined main side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (S12). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information, and the like supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 are output (S13). ).

Following the information output process, a game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as the random number values MR1 to MR5 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (S14). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (S15). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol. Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the display operation of the display device 4B and the opening/closing operation setting of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (S16). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on and off of the segment LED, etc.) on the ordinary symbol display device 20 by executing the ordinary symbol process process, and the variable display of the ordinary symbol and the movable in the normally variable winning ball device 6B. Allows setting of tilting motion of winglets.

After executing the normal symbol process process, the CPU 103 executes a command control process to transmit a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 (S17). As an example, in the command control process, one of the output ports included in the I/O 105 corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table designated by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, the production control After setting the control data to the output port for transmitting the production control command to the substrate 12, set the predetermined control data to the output port of the production control INT signal to turn on the production control INT signal for the predetermined time. From the above, the effect control command can be transmitted based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enable state, the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S15 shown in FIG. 11 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (S101). FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in S101 of FIG. 12 as the start winning determination process. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in S208 and S211 of FIG. 13 as the processing for starting winning. FIG. 15A is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in S220 of FIG. 14 as the winning random number determination process.

In the start winning determination process in the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 13, the CPU 103 first detects the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the first starting opening switch 22A is on (S201). At this time, if the first starting opening switch 22A is on (S201; Yes), the first special figure reservation storage number (the first special figure game reservation number) is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, as the upper limit storage number). It is determined whether it is “4”) (S202). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the first special figure reservation storage number by reading the first reservation storage number count value, which is the stored value of the first reservation storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. When the number of 1st special figure reservation storages is not the upper limit in S202 (S202; No), for example, the stored value of the starting mouth buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "1" (S207).

When the first starting opening switch 22A is off in S201 (S201; No), when the first special figure reservation storage number has reached the upper limit value in S202 (S202; Yes), the processing of S209 is executed. After that, based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning port formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B, whether the second starting port switch 22B is ON or not. Is determined (S203). At this time, if the second starting opening switch 22B is ON (S203; Yes), the second special figure reservation storage number (second special figure game reservation number) is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, as the upper limit storage number). (4)) is determined (S204). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the second special figure reservation storage number by reading the second reservation storage number count value, which is the stored value of the second reservation storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. When the second special figure reservation storage number is not the upper limit value in S204 (S204; No), for example, the stored value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "2" (S210).

After executing the process of S207, the process for starting winning (FIG. 14) is executed (S208), the value stored in the starting mouth buffer is set to "0 (initialization)" (S209), and the process proceeds to S203. After the processing of S210 is executed, the starting winning award processing (FIG. 14) is executed (S211), the stored value of the starting mouth buffer is "0 (initialized)" (S212), and the starting winning determination processing is ended. .. Thereby, even when the first winning opening switch 22A and the second starting opening switch 22B simultaneously detect the starting winning of the game ball, the processing based on the respective detections can be completed.

The CPU 103 updates the number of special figure reservation storages corresponding to the starting mouth buffer value, which is the value stored in the starting mouth buffer, by adding 1 as the starting winning process (S208, S211) (S215 in FIG. 14). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the first holding storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the second holding storage count value is incremented by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. Further, the second reserved storage number count value is updated so as to be incremented by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. Following the processing of S215, the total pending storage number is updated so as to be incremented by 1 (S216). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, may be updated so as to be incremented by 1.

After executing the processing of S216, the CPU 103 selects from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determining Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category are extracted (S217). Numerical data indicating each random number value thus extracted is stored by being set as reservation information at the head of an empty entry in the special figure reservation storage unit 151 corresponding to the starting port buffer value (S218). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are set in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are set in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B.

Subsequent to the processing of S218, the transmission setting of the starting mouth winning designation command according to the starting mouth buffer value is performed (S219). For example, when the starting mouth buffer value is “1”, the storage address of the first starting mouth winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. The setting for transmitting the first starting opening winning award designation command to 12 is performed. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is “2”, the storage address of the second starting opening winning award designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 is controlled. The setting for transmitting the second starting opening winning a prize designation command is performed. The starting mouth winning designation command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control processing of S17 shown in FIG. 11 after the special symbol process processing is completed. To be done.

Subsequent to the processing of S219, a winning random number determination processing is executed (S220). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the reservation storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the reservation storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Is set (S221). The reserved storage number notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control processing of S17 shown in FIG. 11 after the special symbol process processing is completed. To be done.

As the winning random number determination process (S220), the CPU 103 confirms the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by confirming the state of the time saving flag or the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 or the like. It is specified (S401 in FIG. 15A). The CPU 103 specifies that the probability variation state is the probability variation state when the probability variation flag is on, identifies the time variation state when the probability variation flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are off. Sometimes it is necessary to specify that it is in a normal state.

Following the processing of S401, the starting mouth buffer value (“1” or “2”) or the current game is selected from the table data forming the first special figure display result determination table 130A or the second special figure display result determination table 130B. The special figure display result determination table data used for determining the special figure display result is selected corresponding to the state (S402). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the first special figure display result determination table 130A is set in the usage table. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the second special figure display result determination table 130B is set in the use table. After that, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in S217 of FIG. 14 is within the predetermined jackpot determination range (S403). In the big hit determination range, the individual decision values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the special figure display result determination table data selected by the process of S402 are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number value MR1 and each decision. It suffices to be able to determine the presence/absence of a decision value that matches the random number value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination values included in the big hit determination range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and the minimum or maximum value of the big hit determination range. It suffices to be able to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by making a comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it is determined that the variable display result based on the hold data including the random number value MR1 is determined to be a “jackpot” (jump jack start determination). it can.

When it is determined in S403 that it is not within the big hit determination range (S403; No), it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (S404). The CPU 103 executes the same processing as that in the case of the big hit determination range for the determined value assigned to the special figure display result of “small hit” in the special figure display result determination table data selected in the process of S402. It suffices to be able to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the small hit determination range. When it is determined in S404 that it is not within the small hitting determination range (S404; No), a symbol designating command corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “miss” is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Is set (S405).

When it is determined in S404 that it is within the small hit determination range (S404; Yes), a symbol designating command corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “small hit” is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Settings are made (S407).

When it is determined in S403 that it is within the jackpot determination range (S403; Yes), the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (S409). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the variation special map (“first special map” corresponding to “1” or “second special map” corresponding to “2”) specified in correspondence with the starting opening buffer value. From the table data forming the jackpot type determination table 131, the jackpot type determination table data is selected. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined. The setting for transmitting the symbol designating command according to the determination result by the process of S409 to the effect control board 12 is performed (S410).

After performing any of the processes of S405, S407, and S410, the variation category is determined (S412). That is, the variation category is determined to be one of the plurality of types shown in FIG. In the process of S412, the CPU 103 causes the plurality of variation category determination tables stored in the ROM 101 (the plurality of variation category determination tables in which the types of variation categories that can be determined in the variation category determination table, the respective determination rates, and the like are different from each other). ), select one of the variable category determination tables to be set as the usage table.

Specifically, the CPU 103 causes the special figure display result (for example, the determination result of S403 or S404) and the number of reserved memories (for example, the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154). Any of the variable category determination tables to be set as the usage table is selected based on the first reserved storage number count value). Subsequently, the CPU 103 generates a variation category determination table set as a usage table and numerical data indicating a variation category determination random number MR3 extracted from, for example, the random number circuit 104 or the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154. On the basis of this, one of the plurality of types of variation categories is determined.

FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of selection of the variation category determination table. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the variation category determination table. The configuration example of this variation category determination table is four types of variation category tables that are referenced to determine one of a plurality of variation categories. FIG. 17A is a configuration example (denoted as “C-TBL1” in the figure) of a variation category determination table based on a certain variation category determination table among the above four types. FIG. 17B is a configuration example (denoted as “C-TBL2” in the figure) of a variation category determination table according to another variation category determination table. FIG. 17C is a configuration example (denoted as “C-TBL3” in the figure) of a variation category determination table according to still another variation category determination table. FIG. 17C is a configuration example (denoted as “C-TBL4” in the figure) of a variation category determination table according to still another variation category determination table. Note that, for simplification of description, the variation category determination table in which the determination rate is set as shown in FIG. 17A may be simply referred to as the variation category determination table of FIG. 17A. The same applies to FIGS. 17B to 17D and other determination tables such as the variation pattern determination table. FIG. 16 is a selection example of selecting one of the four types (setting “C-TBL1” to setting “C-TBL4”) of FIGS. 17A to 17D, that is, the above-described selection example. This is a selection example of selecting one of the four types of variation category determination tables.

The variation category determination table “C-TBL1” of FIG. 17A (the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” of FIG. 17B, the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” of FIG. 17C, and FIG. In the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” of (D)), a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation category is assigned to a plurality of types of variation categories.

In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 17A, 0 of the 100 determination values (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3 is the variation category. 70 (values in the range of "0" to "69") are assigned to "PA1", and 27 (values in the range of "70" to "96") are assigned to variation category "PA2". “PA3” is assigned, two (values in the range of “97” to “98”) are assigned to the variation category “PA4”, and one (value “99”) is assigned to the variation category “PA5”. There is. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 17A, the variation category “PA1” is 0% (0÷100), the variation category “PA2” is 70% (70÷100), The variation category "PA3" is determined at a rate of 27% (27/100), the variation category "PA4" at 2% (2/100), and the variation category "PA5" at a rate of 1% (1/100).

In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 17B, four out of 100 (“0” to “99” in range) of the determination value of the random number MR3 (“0”). ”To “3”) are assigned to the variation category “PA1”, 85 (values in the range “4” to “88”) are assigned to the variation category “PA2”, and eight (“89”). ”To “96”) is assigned to the variation category “PA3”, two (values in the range “97” to “98”) to the variation category “PA4”, and one (value “value”). 99”) is assigned to the variation category “PA5”. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 17B, the variation category “PA1” is 4% (4÷100), the variation category “PA2” is 85% (85÷100), The variation category “PA3” is determined by 8% (8÷100), the variation category “PA4” is determined by 2% (2÷100), and the variation category “PA5” is determined by 1% (1÷100).

In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” in FIG. 17C, 64 (“0” of 100 determined values of the random number MR3 (values in the range of “0” to “99”)) ”To “63”) are assigned to the variation category “PA1”, 25 (values in the range “64” to “88”) are assigned to the variation category “PA2”, and eight (“89”). ] To "96") is assigned to the variation category "PA3", two (values in the range "97" to "98") are assigned to the variation category "PA4", and one (value "value" 99”) is assigned to the variation category “PA5”. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “CTBL3” in FIG. 17C, the variation category “PA1” is 64% (64÷100), the variation category “PA2” is 25% (25÷100), the variation category “PA3” is determined at a rate of 8% (8÷100), variation category “PA4” at a rate of 2% (2÷100), and variation category “PA5” at a rate of 1% (1÷100).

In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” in FIG. 17D, 20 (“0”) of 100 (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the determination value of the random number value MR3. ”To “19”) are assigned to the variation category “PB3”, 40 (values in the range “20” to “59”) are assigned to the variation category “PB4”, and 40 (“60”). "To a value in the range of "99") is assigned to the variation category "PB5". That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” in FIG. 17D, the variation category “PB3” is 20% (20÷100), the variation category “PB4” is 40% (40÷100), The variation category “PB5” is determined at a rate of 40% (40÷100).

In the setting examples of FIGS. 17A to 17C, when the special figure display result is “miss”, when the number of pending storages is large, the shortening/non-reach ( Loss) The determination rate of the variation category (variation category “PA1”) is increased. Specifically, the determination rate “64%” of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” selected when the special figure display result is “miss” and the number of retained memories is “4”. > The determination rate of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” selected when the special map display result is “miss” and the number of pending storages is “3” or “2” “4%” > The determination rate of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” selected when the special figure display result is “miss” and the number of pending storages is “1” is “0%”.

In addition, in the setting examples of FIGS. 17A to 17C, when the special figure display result is “miss”, the variation category of the super reach (miss) is large or small even if the number of held memories is small or large. The variation category "PA4" or the variation category "PA5") is fixed at a fixed rate. Specifically, in any of the variation category determination table "C-TBL1", the variation category determination table "C-TBL2", and the variation category determination table "C-TBL3", the determination rate of the variation category "PA5" is " 1%” and the determination rate of the variation category “PA4” is “2%”.

In addition, in the setting examples of FIGS. 17A to 17C, any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” is used. Even if there is, the determined value of the random number value MR3 that corresponds to the same (common) variation category (the same variation category is determined) exists. That is, if the determined value of the random number value MR3 is a certain value, it is either the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, or the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”. Also, the same variation category is determined. For example, when the determined value of the random number value MR3 is "99", it is one of the variation category determination table "C-TBL1", the variation category determination table "C-TBL2", and the variation category determination table "C-TBL3". Also, the variation category “PA5” is determined. Further, when the determined value of the random number value MR3 is a value in the range of "97" to "98", the variation category "PA4" is determined in any of the above variation category determination tables.

Further, when the determined value of the random number value MR3 is a value in the range of “89” to “96”, the variation category “PA3” is determined in any of the above variation category determination tables. Further, when the determined value of the random number value MR3 is a value in the range of "64" to "69", the variation category "PA2" is determined in any of the above variation category determination tables. As a result, if the determined value of the random number value MR3 is a certain value (a value in each range described above), it is determined that the reach, the super reach, the super reach α, or the super reach β is performed in advance. It can be easily determined. Therefore, it is possible to notify them before the variable display corresponding to the start winning, and the interest in the game can be improved. In the setting examples of FIGS. 17A to 17C, when the determined value of the random number value MR3 is a value in the range of “0” to “69”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, In either of the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”, the variation category “PA1” or “PA2” is determined. This makes it possible to easily determine in advance whether or not the reach is not reached at least.

After that, according to the determination result (determination result) of the process of S412, after setting for transmitting any of the variation category commands shown in FIG. 15B to the production control board 12 (S413). The winning random number determination process ends.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101 of FIG. 12, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. To do.

The special symbol normal process of S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0". In this special symbol normal processing, whether or not to make the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol "big hit" or "small hit" is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Done. In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is predetermined. The special symbol normal processing will be described later.

The variation pattern setting process of S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting processing includes processing for determining the fluctuation pattern as one of a plurality of types shown in FIG. 5, a first fluctuation start command (or a second fluctuation start command), a fluctuation pattern designation command, and a variable display result notification command. It includes a transmission setting process and the like for transmitting information such as. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variable display of the special symbol is started, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2". The setting of the fluctuation pattern will be described later.

The special symbol variation process of S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation process, a process for setting for changing the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts varying It includes a process for measuring For example, every time the special symbol variation process of S112 is executed, the special symbol variation timer value that is the stored value in the special symbol variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153 is subtracted from or added to 1, and the first It is the first special figure game by the special symbol display device 4A (special figure game using the first special figure), or the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B (special figure using the second special figure) Whether the game) or not, a common timer measures the elapsed time. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In this way, the special symbol variation process of S112 may be a process of controlling the variation of the special symbol in the first special figure game or the second special figure game by a common processing routine. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3".

The special symbol stop process of S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the fixed special symbol that is the variable display result of the special symbol. It includes the process to set up for. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is turned on, and if the big hit flag is turned on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". To be done. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the small hit flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". In addition, when both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

The big hit opening preprocessing of S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". In this big hit opening pre-processing, based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit", etc., processing to start the execution of the round in the big hit game state and make settings to open the big winning opening, etc. include. At this time, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the special winning opening is opened may be set in accordance with whether the jackpot type is “non-probable change”, “probable change”, or “sudden change”. As an example, in response to the big hit type "non-probability change" or "probability change", the upper limit of the period for which the special winning opening is opened is set to "29 seconds", and the maximum winning number is the maximum number of times to execute the round. By setting the number of times the mouth is opened to "15 times", it is sufficient to set the normal open big hit state. On the other hand, in response to the jackpot type "Sudden", the upper limit of the period for which the special winning opening is opened is set to "0.1 seconds", and the number of opening of the special winning opening, which is the maximum number of times to execute the round, is set. By setting “15 times” to, it is sufficient to set the short-term open big hit state. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5".

The big hit opening process in S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, and the big winning opening based on the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the open state from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the special winning opening is returned to the closed state, after the process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6". ..

The post-big hit opening process of S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This big hit opening post processing determines whether or not the number of executions of the round in which the special winning opening is opened has reached the maximum winning opening maximum number, and the maximum winning opening maximum has been reached. In this case, a process for making settings for transmitting the big hit end designation command is included. When the number of rounds executed has not reached the maximum winning opening maximum number, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the maximum winning opening maximum number is reached, the special figure The value of the process flag is updated to "7".

The big hit ending process of S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". In this big hit ending process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect is executed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state by the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8 and the lamp 9 is passed. It includes a process of waiting until and a process of performing various settings for starting the probability variation control and the time saving control in response to the end of the big hit game state. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

The small hit opening pre-processing of S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". The small hit opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the big winning opening in the small hit game state based on that the variable display result is "small hit". As an example, when the variable display result is "small hit", the upper limit of the period for which the special winning opening is open is set as in the case where the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probable". It is only necessary to set "0.1 seconds" and set the number of times of opening of the special winning opening to "15 times" to set the small hitting game state. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9".

The small hitting open process in S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this small hit opening process, it is the process of measuring the elapsed time after opening the big winning opening and the timing to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time etc. A process for determining whether or not it is included is included. When returning the special winning opening to the closed state, a process of stopping the supply of the drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door may be executed. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10".

The small hitting end processing of S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". In this small hit completion processing, the production device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8 and the lamp 9 waits until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed. It includes processing to do. Here, when the small hit game state ends, the state of the probability change flag and the time saving flag are not changed, and the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 12 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 18, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol reservation storage number is “0” (S231). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second special figure game is held. For example, in the processing of S231, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be read and it may be determined whether or not the read value is "0".

When the number of the second special figure reservation storage is other than "0" in S231 (S231; No), the special data is stored as the reservation data stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B in correspondence with the reservation number "1". The random number value MR1 for determining the figure display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type are read out (S232). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored by being stored in, for example, a fluctuation random number buffer.

Subsequent to the processing of S232, the second special figure reserved storage number is updated by subtracting 1 from the second reserved storage number count value, and the second special figure reserved storage number is decremented by 1, and the second special figure reserved storage unit is updated. In 151B, the reservation data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number “1” (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers “2” to “4”) are shifted upward by one entry ( S233). In the process of S233, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be updated so that the total reserved storage number count value stored in the total reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1. At this time, the value of the variable special map designation buffer, which is the value stored in the variable special figure designation buffer, is updated to "2" (S234).

When the second special figure reservation storage number is "0" in S231 (S231; Yes), it is determined whether the first special figure reservation storage number is "0" (S235). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first special figure game is held. For example, in the process of S235, the game control counter setting unit 154 may read the first reserved storage number count value stored in the first reserved storage number counter, and determine whether or not the read value is "0". ..

In this way, the process of S235 is executed when it is determined in S231 that the number of second special figure pending storage is “0”, so that the first special figure game and the second special figure game are executed. 2 is held, the second special figure game is executed with priority over the first special figure game. It should be noted that the second special figure game is not limited to the mode in which the second special figure game is executed with priority over the first special figure game, and the game ball enters (passes) through the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). ), and the special drawing game (first special drawing game, second special drawing game) may be executed in the order in which the start winnings (first starting prize, second starting prize) are generated. In this case, it suffices to provide a table for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the start winning is generated, and to determine which of the first special figure game and the second special figure game is to be executed from the stored data.

When the number of the first special figure reservation storage is other than "0" in S235 (S235; No), the special data is stored as the reservation data stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A corresponding to the reservation number "1". Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the figure display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type are read out (S236). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored by being stored in, for example, a fluctuation random number buffer.

Subsequent to the processing of S236, the first special figure reserved storage number is updated by subtracting 1 from the first reserved storage number count value, and the first special figure reserved storage number is decremented by 1. The reservation data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number “1” in 151A (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers “2” to “4”) are shifted upward by one entry. S237). Further, in the processing of S237, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be updated so that the total reserved storage number count value stored in the total reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1. At this time, the fluctuation special map designation buffer value is updated to "1" (S238).

After performing either of the processing of S234 and S238, as a use table for determining whether the special symbol display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol is “big hit” or “miss”, as shown in FIG. Similar to the processing of S402 shown in (A), the special figure display result determination table data is selected (S239). That is, in the process of S402, the first special figure display result determination table 130A or the second special figure display result determination table 130B is set in the use table according to the starting opening buffer value (“1” or “2”). In the process of S239, when the fluctuation special map designation buffer value is "1", the first special figure display result determination table 130A is set in the use table, and when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "2". May set the second special figure display result determination table 130B to the use table. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for variation is assigned to the special figure display results of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “miss”. By comparing with the value, it is determined which of the "big hit", the "small hit" and the "miss" is given to the special figure display result (S240).

After the special figure display result is determined in S240, it is determined whether the special figure display result is "big hit" (S241). Then, when it is determined that the "big hit" (S241; Yes), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the ON state (S242). At this time, the jackpot type determination table 131 is selected and set as a use table for determining the jackpot type to any of a plurality of types (S243). By referring to the jackpot type determination table 131 thus set, the numerical data indicating the jackpot type determining random number value MR2 stored in the random number buffer for variation is changed to "indeterminate change", "probable change", or "avoid". Depending on which of the determination values assigned to each jackpot type matches, one of the plurality of jackpot types is determined (S244).

In accordance with the jackpot type thus determined, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (S245), the determined jackpot type Remember. As an example, if the big hit type is "non-probable change", the big hit type buffer value may be "0", if it is "probable change", it may be "1", and if it is "probable", it may be "2".

When it is determined in S241 that it is not a "big hit" (S241; No), it is determined whether the special figure display result is a "small hit" (S246). Then, when it is determined to be a "small hit" (S246; Yes), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to an on state (S247).

If it is determined in S246 that it is not a "small hit" (S246; No), or after performing any of the processes of S245 and S247, whether to control to the big hit game state or the small hit game state In accordance with the determination result, further, the determination result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot gaming state, the fixed special symbol is set (S248).

After setting the confirmed special symbol in S248, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" which is a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S249), and the special symbol normal process is ended. If the number of pending memories of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" in S235 (S235; Yes), after performing a predetermined demo display setting (S250), the special symbol normal process ends. To do. In this demo display setting, for example, a production control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined production image on the image display device 5 is controlled from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not it has been transmitted to the board 12. At this time, if it has been transmitted, the demo display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo designation command is performed, and then the demo display setting ends.

In the fluctuation pattern setting process of S111, the CPU 103 selects the random number value MR3 for fluctuation category determination and the fluctuation pattern determination fluctuation from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154. Numerical data indicating the numerical value MR5 is extracted.

As described above, when the determination value of the random number value MR3 corresponding to the same variation category exists in each of the variation category determination tables corresponding to the number of pending storages, the determination corresponding to the same variation category is performed. When the random number value MR3 that matches the value is extracted at the time of winning, the number of reserved memories is significantly different between when the winning random number determination process (S220) is executed and when the variation pattern setting process (S111) is executed. Also, in the variation pattern setting process, the same variation category as in the winning random number determination process is determined. For example, in the specific examples of the variable category determination tables “C-TBL1” to “C-TBL3” described above, if the random number value MR3 extracted at the time of winning is “99”, regardless of the number of reserved memories, the winning prize is won. The fluctuation category “PA5” is determined by both the hourly random number determination processing and the fluctuation pattern setting processing. If the random number value MR3 extracted at the time of winning is, for example, in the range of "97" to "98", the variation category "PA4" is determined by the random number determination processing at the time of winning and the variation pattern setting processing regardless of the number of reserved memories. To be done. In the process of S261, it is preferable to determine the variation category by using the variation category determination random number MR3 stored as the reserved data, but the CPU 103 newly extracts the variation category determination random number MR3. Then, the variation category may be determined using the newly extracted random value MR3 for determining the variation category.

Subsequently, the CPU 103 determines the variation category by using the newly extracted random value MR3 for determining the variation category, as in S412. That is, as shown in FIG. 16, the variation category determination table to be used is selected from the plurality of variation category determination tables shown in FIG. 17 based on the special figure display result and the number of pending storages, and the selected variation category determination table is selected. And the variation category is determined based on the random number MR3 for determining the variation category. Then, the CPU 103 selects one of the plurality of fluctuation pattern determination tables stored in the ROM 101, which is the fluctuation pattern determination table to be set as the use table, based on the fluctuation category as the determination result. Subsequently, the CPU 103 selects one of the plurality of types of variation patterns based on the variation pattern determination table set as the usage table and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR5 for determining the variation pattern described above. decide.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of setting the determination ratio of the variation pattern. It is assumed that the ROM 101 stores eight types of variation pattern determination tables according to variation categories. FIG. 19A is an example of setting the determination rate of the variation pattern by the variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA1 (shortening/non-reach loss)” among the above eight types. FIG. 19B is a setting example of the determination rate of the variation pattern by the variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA2 (non-reach (miss))” among the above eight types. FIG. 19C is a setting example of the variation pattern determination ratio by the variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA3 (normal reach (miss))” among the above eight types. The same applies to FIGS. 19D to 19H below.

As described above, in the main board 11, in the start winning determination processing of S101, the transmission setting for transmitting the start mouth winning designation command according to the start opening buffer value is performed to the effect control board 12 (S219). ), S403, S404, S409, etc., the transmission setting for transmitting the symbol designating command according to the special figure display result is performed (S405, S407, S410), according to the variation category determined in S412. The transmission setting for transmitting the variable category command (S413) is performed, and the transmission setting for transmitting the reserved storage number notification command is performed (S221).

After these processes are executed, by executing the command control process of S17 shown in FIG. 11, the game ball passes (enters) the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). When the first starting condition or the second starting condition is satisfied, a starting mouth winning designation command (first starting mouth winning designation command or second starting mouth winning designation command), a symbol designating command, a variable category command, a reserved memory number notification command The four commands (first reserved storage number notification command or second reserved storage number notification command) are collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt as one set.

Further, in the main board 11, in the special symbol normal process of S110, the fixed special symbol which is the variable display result of the special symbol is obtained by using the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the like. In the variation pattern setting process of S111, the variation pattern of the decorative pattern is determined using the random value MR3 for determining the variation category, the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern, and the like.

Further, in the variation pattern setting process of S111, a variable display result notification command for designating the fixed special symbol determined as described above, a variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern of the decorative pattern determined as described above, and the like are produced. Transmission settings for transmission to the control board 12 are performed. When variable display is started by executing the command control process of S17 shown in FIG. 11 after these processes are executed, the variable display result notification command, the variation pattern designation command, etc. are set within one timer interrupt. It is sent in a batch. Note that the commands are not limited to being collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt, and one command may be sequentially transmitted by the command control processing of S17 for each timer interrupt.

That is, at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, the special symbol display process (variable display result of the special symbol) in the special symbol normal process (S110) is set as "big hit" or "small hit" and the big hit game state. Whether or not to control to the small hitting gaming state is made, and in the variation pattern setting process (S111), a specific variable display mode (variation pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined, etc. The content determined by is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Further, prior to this, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening), a "big hit" or "small hit" is made by the random number determination process at the time of winning (S220). As a "hit", it is determined whether or not it is controlled to a big hit game state or a small hit game state, a rough variable display mode (variation category) of a decorative design, etc. is determined, and determined by each production control command. The content is transmitted to the effect control board 12.

Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 20 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and mount the effect control board 12. The CTC (counter/timer circuit) registers are set. Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (S72). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (S72; No), the process of S72 is repeatedly executed and stands by.

On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command or the like from the main board 11 occurs in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt processing, a control such as a performance control command is performed from a predetermined input port of the input ports included in the I/O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. Capture the signal.

The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194, for example. As an example, when the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON in S72 (S72; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the OFF state (S73), and the command analysis process is executed (S74). In the command analysis process executed in S74, for example, after the various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer are read, the read operation is performed. Settings and controls corresponding to the production control commands are performed.

After executing the command analysis process in S74, the effect control process process is executed (S75). In the effect control process process of S75, various effect devices such as an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, a voice output operation from the speaker 8, a light emission operation in the lamp 9, and a drive operation in the effect model are performed. With respect to the control contents of the effect operation used, judgment, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the production control process processing of S75, production random number update processing is executed (S76), and the production random numbers counted by the random counter of the production control counter setting unit 193 are shown as various random number values used for production control. Numerical data is updated by software. Then, the process returns to S72. Various random number values updated in S76 and used for effect control include various random number values such as MR6 to MR15 in addition to random number values for determining a definite symbol described later.

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in S74 of FIG. 20 as command analysis processing. In the command analysis processing shown in FIG. 21, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms the stored content of the effect control command reception buffer to confirm that the received command from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 is received. It is determined whether there is any (S501). At this time, if there is no received command (S501; No), the command analysis process ends.

If there is a received command in S501 (S501; Yes), for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command, it is determined whether or not the received command is the first start mouth winning designation command (S502). .. Then, when the command is the first start opening winning award designation command (S502; Yes), the first waiting storage number notification waiting time is set (S503). For example, in the process of S503, if a timer initial value predetermined corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first reserved storage number notification command is set in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192. Good.

If the received command is not the first start mouth prize designation command in S502 (S502; No), it is determined whether the received command is the second start mouth prize designation command (S504). Then, when the command is the second start opening winning award designation command (S504; Yes), the second waiting storage number notification waiting time is set (S505). For example, in the processing of S505, the command reception control timer may be set to a timer initial value that is predetermined in correspondence with the reception waiting time of the second reserved storage number notification command.

When the received command is not the second start mouth winning designation command in S504 (S504; No), it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designation command (S506). If the received command is not a symbol designating command in S506 (S506; No), it is determined whether the received command is a variable category command (S507). When the received command is not the variable category command in S507 (S507; No), it is determined whether the received command is the first reserved storage number notification command (S508). Then, when the command is the first reserved storage number notification command (S508; Yes), the first reserved storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer (S509).

If the received command is not the first reserved storage number notification command in S508 (S508; No), it is determined whether the received command is the second reserved storage number notification command (S510). When it is the second reserved storage number notification command (S510; Yes), the second reserved storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the time counting operation by the command reception control timer (S511).

If the received command is a symbol designating command in S506 (S506; Yes), if the received command is a variable category command in S507 (S507; Yes), or one of the processes of S503, S505, S509, and S511 is executed. After that, if the first reserved storage number notification waiting time is set in the process of S503 for the received command received immediately before the received command, the received command is received in the first start winning award received command buffer 194A. After storing at the beginning of the empty area in (S512), the process returns to S501.

If the received command is a symbol designating command in S506 (S506; Yes), the received command is a variable category command in S507 (S507; Yes), or any of the processes of S503, S505, S509, and S511. After executing, if the second hold storage number notification waiting time is set in the processing of S503 for the reception command received immediately before the reception command, the reception command is set to the second start winning award reception command. After storing at the beginning of the empty area in the buffer 194B (S512), the process returns to S501.

In addition, when the first reserved storage number notification command is received together with the first variation start command, the reserved storage number notification command may not be stored in the first start winning award reception command buffer 194A. That is, it is sufficient that the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the empty area in the first start winning time reception command buffer 194A.

Further, when the second reserved storage number notification command is received together with the second variation start command, the reserved storage number notification command does not have to be stored in the second start prize winning time reception command buffer 194B. That is, it is sufficient that the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the head of the empty area in the second starting winning time reception command buffer 194B.

If the received command is not the second reserved storage number notification command in S510 (S510; No), settings are made according to other received commands (S513), and then the process returns to S501. For example, when the received command is a game state designation command, the game state designation command is analyzed to specify the current game state. Further, for example, when the received command is a hit end designation command, the hit end designation command is analyzed to specify whether or not the time is short.

Starting mouth winning designation command (first starting mouth winning designation command or second starting mouth winning designation command), symbol designating command, variation category command, pending storage number notification command (first pending storage number notification command, second pending storage number Like the notification command), the effect control command received from the main board 11 when the start winning is generated is also called a command at the time of starting winning. The first reserved storage number notification command, the second reserved storage number notification command, the first starting mouth winning designation command, and the second starting mouth winning designation command are also referred to as reserved storage information. The symbol designating command and the variation category command are also referred to as determination result information.

When the received commands are sequentially stored from the beginning of the free area in the first start winning prize reception command buffer 194A, whether the received command is a symbol designating command, a variation category command, or a first reserved memory number notification command The received commands may be stored without distinction, or each received command may be distinguished and stored at the beginning of the empty area in the corresponding storage area.

Further, when the received commands are sequentially stored from the beginning of the empty area in the second start winning prize reception command buffer 194B, it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designating command, a variation category command, or a second reserved storage number notification command. The received commands may be stored without distinction, or each received command may be distinguished and stored at the beginning of the empty area in the corresponding storage area.

22 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S75 of FIG. 20 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 22, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prize time effect determination process (S150). 23 to 24 are flowcharts showing an example of a process executed in S150 of FIG. 22 as a winning effect determination process.

23 to 24, in the effect determination process at the time of winning, the effect control CPU 120 first in the start winning command reception command buffer (the first starting winning command buffer 194A or the second starting winning command buffer 194B). The stored contents are checked (S151), and it is determined whether or not the first starting opening winning award designation command is received as a new received command (S152). When it is determined in S152 that the first start winning combination designation command has not been received (S152; No), the stored content in the second start winning combination reception command buffer 194B is checked (S153), and as a new reception command, It is determined whether or not the second starting opening winning award designation command is received (S153). When it is determined in S154 that the second start mouth winning award designation command has not been received (S154; No), the winning effect determination process is ended.

When it is determined in S152 that the first start mouth winning award designation command is received (S152; Yes), when it is specified in the process of S513 in the command analysis process of FIG. 21 that the time is not shortened (S155 : NO), the first hold effect determination process is executed (S160). The first hold effect determination process includes a process of determining a display mode (also referred to as a display mode during addition) of the hold display when the additional display is performed in the first starting prize winning memory display area 5HL. In addition, when executing the hold change effect or the hold change change effect for the hold display at the time of additionally displaying in the first start winning a prize memory display area 5HL, in the step, whether the hold change effect or the hold change effect effect is executed. A process of deciding whether or not to execute, a process of deciding the execution timing of the holding effect when it is decided to execute the holding effect, and the like may be performed.

First, the determination process for determining the display mode of the hold display when the additional display is performed in the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL will be described. FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display. It is assumed that the ROM 121 stores seven types of pending display mode determination tables according to the variation category. FIG. 25(A) is a hold display mode selected when the variation category is “PA1 (shortening/non-reach loss)” or the variation category “PA2 (non-reach (loss))” among the seven types described above. It is a setting example (H-TBL1) of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the determination table. FIG. 25B is a setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display according to the hold display form determination table selected when the variation category is “PA3 (normal reach (miss))” among the seven types described above ( H-TBL 2). FIG. 25C shows the setting of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display form determination table selected when the variation category is “PA4 (super reach α (miss))” among the seven types described above. It is an example (H-TBL3).

FIG. 25D is a setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PA5 (super reach β (miss)” among the seven types described above. 25(E) is a display of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PB3 (normal reach (big hit))” among the above-mentioned seven types. Fig. 25(F) is an example of setting the determination rate of the mode (H-TBL5), and is selected when the variation category is "PB4 (super reach α (big hit))" among the above-mentioned seven types. Fig. 25(G) is a setting example (H-TBL6) of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the display mode determination table, and the variation category "PB5 (super reach β (big hit)) out of the seven types described above. Is a setting example (H-TBL7) of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display according to the hold display mode determination table selected when "".

According to FIG. 25, the display mode of the hold display is determined by each of the tables (A) to (G). The types of display modes to be determined are the normal display mode, the first specific display mode, and It is roughly classified into three, that is, the second specific display mode. The normal display mode is “sphere”. The first specific display mode is an icon-shaped display mode using "characters" (also referred to as a character icon). The second specific display mode is an icon-shaped display mode (also referred to as a character icon) using a “character” made of a “human character”. An example of a “sphere” is shown in FIGS. 31A and 31B. Examples of “character icons” are shown in FIGS. 36 and 38. Examples of “character icons” are shown in FIGS. 36 and 39. The icon-like hold display such as the “character icon” and the “character icon” is used for the effect as a hold display of a specific display mode of a type different from the normal “sphere” normal display mode.

In the hold display form determination table of FIG. 25, when the hold display of the hold storage to be determined is determined to be the display form of the character icon, the display form of the predetermined character icon (for example, the display at the time of appearance composed of the characters “Caution”) is displayed. After the hold display appears in (Mode), one of the hold display mode change effect and the variation-corresponding display mode change effect may be executed corresponding to the hold storage in which the hold display is displayed. The hold display mode change effect by the character icon is, for example, an effect that suggests that the display mode of the character changes during the hold display after the hold display by the character icon appears and is displayed in the normal display mode (for example, "Caution"). It is an effect that suggests that the characters in the normal display mode are changed to the characters in the specific display mode such as “opportunity” or “intense heat”. The variation corresponding display mode change effect by the character icon is, for example, an effect that suggests that the display mode of the character icon similarly changes during active display (during display in the active display area AHA) corresponding to hold display by the character icon. Is. The hold display mode change effect and the variation-corresponding display mode change effect may be collectively referred to as a display mode change effect. Specific examples of the pending display mode change effect by the character icon and the change corresponding display mode change effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 38.

In the table of FIG. 25, when the hold display of the target hold storage is determined to be the display mode of the character icon, the hold display is performed in the display mode of the predetermined character icon (for example, the display mode at the time of appearance consisting of one character). After appearing, one of the hold display mode change effect and the variation corresponding display mode change effect may be executed in correspondence with the hold storage in which the hold display is made. The hold display mode change effect by the character icon is, for example, an effect that suggests that the display mode of the character changes during the hold display after the hold display by the character icon appears and is displayed in the normal display mode (for example, one character. Is an effect that suggests that the normal display mode is changed to a specific display mode of two characters or three characters. The variation-corresponding display mode change effect by the character icon is, for example, an effect that suggests that the display mode of the character icon similarly changes during active display corresponding to the hold display. Specific examples of the pending display mode change effect by the character icon and the change corresponding display mode change effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

The reserved display of "sphere" is displayed as "red sphere" "yellow sphere" "blue sphere" "white sphere" in each table of FIG. With respect to the hold display of the “sphere”, for example, in the case of reach, as compared with the case of non-reach, red or yellow is easily determined, and blue or white (initial color) is difficult to be determined. Also, in the case of a reach, when it is a hot reach (for example, super reach), red or yellow is more likely to be determined, and blue or white is less likely to be determined than when it is a reach that is not hot (for example, normal reach). ing. Alternatively, according to FIGS. 16, 17, and 25, when the special figure display result is “big hit”, red and yellow are more easily determined than when the special figure display result is “miss”, and blue or It is difficult to determine the white color. In other words, the red or yellow display mode has a higher degree of expectation that a hot effect will be executed or a larger jackpot than the blue or white display mode. More specifically, in the order of red, yellow, blue, and white, the degree of expectation that a hot effect will be executed and the degree of expectation that a big hit will be high.

The display mode of the hold display of the character icon is displayed as "character" in each table of FIG. When “character” is determined, the newly added hold display is set to the display mode (normal display mode) of the character icon, and the above-described hold display is performed corresponding to the hold storage in which the hold display is displayed. Either the display mode change effect or the change-corresponding display mode change effect can be executed.

The display mode of the hold display of the character icon is displayed as "Charakura" in each table of FIG. When the "character" is determined, the newly added hold display is set to the display mode (normal display mode) of the character icon, and the hold display as described above is performed corresponding to the hold storage in which the hold display is displayed. Either the display mode change effect or the change-corresponding display mode change effect can be executed.

According to the table of FIG. 25, as can be understood by referring to the determination ratio of the random number MR6, as the variable display having a higher expectation of a big hit is selected, the hold display by the character icon or the hold display by the character icon is selected. The percentage is high. In this example, the higher the degree of expectation of a big hit, the higher the ratio of selecting the hold display by the character icon than the hold display by the character icon.

In the first hold effect determination process (S160), the effect control CPU 120 stores the plurality of hold display mode determination tables shown in FIG. 25 based on the change category designated by the change category command transmitted from the main board 11. The hold display mode determination table to be used is selected, and the hold is additionally displayed in the first start winning a prize memory display area 5HL based on the selected hold display mode determination table and the random value MR6 for determining the display mode of the hold display. The display mode of display (display mode at the time of addition) is determined. As a result, the display mode of the hold display additionally displayed in the first start winning a prize memory display area 5HL is determined to be one of "sphere", "character icon" and "character icon", and also "sphere". In case the color is determined.

After executing the first hold effect determination process (S160), the effect control CPU 120 stores the determination content of the first hold effect determination process based on the determination result of the first hold effect determination process (S161). Specifically, for example, the effect control CPU 120 changes the display mode of the hold display in the first hold effect determination process to the first start prize-winning reception command buffer 194A corresponding to the buffer number of the first start prize. The determination content (display mode at the time of addition) of the first holding effect determination processing is stored in association with the buffer number of the prefetching announcement buffer 194C.

Note that the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the hold change effect in the first hold effect determination process for the hold display of “sphere”, and when it is determined to execute the hold change effect, the hold effect. First start winning award reception command buffer corresponding to the determination content of the determination process (execution timing when executing the hold change effect, execution timing when executing the hold change gase effect, execution timing when executing the hold change effect) Corresponding to the buffer number of the first look-ahead notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number in 194A, the determination content of the pending effect determination process (information indicating that the pending change effect is executed (for example, flag), the pending change gasse effect) Information indicating execution (for example, flag), information indicating execution of hold change (for example, flag), and hold display changed by the hold effect as the hold display of the target (that is, hold by the first start winning) Information (for example, the buffer number of the first pre-reading notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number of the first start winning prize in the first start winning prize reception command buffer 194A) may be stored.

In this case, for example, in the first hold effect determination process at the time of the first start winning prize for the third special figure hold memory number 3, the addition display mode “white”, hold effect “execution (hold change effect execution)” If the execution timing is “next variation”, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the buffer number of the first start prize in the first start prize-winning reception command buffer 194A (for example, the buffer number “3”). The display mode “white” at the time of addition is stored in association with the buffer number (buffer number “3”) of the first prefetching advance notice buffer 194C corresponding to the execution timing “next variation”. 1 Start-up winning notification that the pending change effect is executed in association with the buffer number (buffer number “1”) of the first prefetching notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number (buffer number “1”) in the reception command buffer 194A The indicated information and the buffer number “3” may be stored.

When the CPU 120 for effect control determines to execute the hold change effect in the first hold effect determination process for the hold display of “sphere”, the first start corresponding to the execution timing of the first hold effect determination process. Only the information for specifying the target hold display (hold display due to the first start winning) is stored by being associated with the buffer number of the first pre-reading notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number in the winning reception command buffer 194A. The information indicating that the pending change effect is executed may not be stored.

After performing the process of S161, the effect control CPU 120 displays the hold mode determined in the first hold effect determination process (S160) (the first start prize winning buffer in the first start winning combination reception command buffer 194A). The first hold addition that adds a new hold display to the first start winning award storage display area 5HL based on the display mode at the time of addition stored in association with the buffer number of the first prefetching notice buffer 194C corresponding to the number. The process is executed (S162). More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first start winning award storage display area 5HL to display a hold display in the additional display mode stored in association with the buffer number of the first prefetching notice buffer 194C described above. By setting the control pattern as the use pattern and transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, the first hold effect The hold display according to the display mode at the time of addition determined in the determination processing is added to the first start winning a prize memory display area 5HL. Then, the process proceeds to S166.

If it is determined in S154 that the second start opening winning award designation command is received (S154; Yes), and if it is specified in the processing of S513 in the command analysis processing of FIG. 21 that it is time-saving (S156: YES). ), the second hold effect determination process is executed (S163). The second hold effect determination process includes a process of determining the display mode (also referred to as an additional display mode) of the hold display when the additional display is performed in the second start prize winning storage display area 5HR. As a result, the display mode of the hold display additionally displayed in the second start winning a prize memory display area 5HR is determined to be one of "sphere", "character icon" and "character icon", and also "sphere". In case the color is determined. In addition, when executing the hold change effect or the hold change change effect for the hold display when the additional display is performed in the second start winning prize memory display area 5HR, whether the hold change effect or the hold change effect effect is executed in the step. A process of deciding whether or not to execute, a process of deciding the execution timing of the holding effect when it is decided to execute the holding effect, and the like may be performed.

The processes of S163, S164, and S165 relating to the second starting mouth winning are the same as the processes of S160, S161, and S162 relating to the first starting mouth winning, respectively. Can be read as “second” and the code can be read corresponding to the reading, so description will be omitted.

When it is determined in S152 that the first start mouth winning award designation command is received (S152; Yes), and when it is specified that the time is shortened in the process of S513 in the command analysis process of FIG. 21 (S155: YES), The effect control CPU 120 determines the display mode of the first hold display to be additionally displayed in the first start winning a prize memory display area 5HL to be the initial color (white), and sets the stored content in the first start winning award reception command buffer 194A. Corresponding to the same buffer number as the corresponding buffer number, the first reserved display in white display mode is added to the first starting winning prize memory display area 5HL (S166). Then, the award winning effect determination process is ended.

When it is determined in S154 that the second start opening winning award designation command is received (S154; Yes), and it is specified in the process of S513 in the command analysis process of FIG. 21 that it is not time-saving (S156: YES). ), the production control CPU 120 determines the display mode of the second hold display to be additionally displayed in the second start winning award memory display area 5HR to the normal display (white ball), and in the second start winning award reception command buffer 194B. The second hold display in the normal display (white ball) display mode is added to the second start winning award memory display area 5HR in association with the same buffer number as the buffer number corresponding to the stored content (S166). Then, the award winning effect determination process is ended.

In S166, the effect control CPU 120 executes a zone effect determination process. The zone effect is one of the look-ahead notice effects, and is an effect that suggests the possibility that the high-expected hold memory is stored by changing the background screen to a mode different from the normal mode. The zone effect determination process (S166) includes a process of determining whether or not to execute the zone effect and an effect mode when the zone effect is selected, using the zone effect selection table shown in FIG.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a zone effect selection table. FIG. 26 shows a setting example of whether or not to execute the zone effect and the determination rate of the effect mode at the time of execution. Specifically, in the zone effect selection table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR13 (not shown) for determining whether or not to execute the zone effect is “executed” and “not executed”. Each is assigned at a determined rate as shown in FIG. Further, in the "with execution" of this zone effect selection table, the numerical value (decision value) that is compared with the random number value MR13 (not shown) for determination is "first effect mode (low expectation)" and "first effect mode". 2 effect modes (high expectations)” are assigned at the determined rates as shown in FIG.

It should be noted that "execution" and "first effect mode (low expectation)" indicate that the zone effect is executed in the first effect mode (low expectation), and "execution" "second effect mode (high expectation)" "Degree)" indicates that the zone effect is executed in the second effect mode (high expectation). Further, "no execution" indicates that no zone effect is executed.

According to the zone effect selection table shown in FIG. 26, as can be understood by referring to the determination rate of the random number MR13, the higher the expectation degree of the big hit is, the higher the rate of the zone effect is executed. Moreover, the higher the degree of expectation of a big hit, the higher the ratio of the zone effect being executed in the second effect mode than in the first effect mode. In the present embodiment, the background screen of image display device 5 is displayed in white as a normal mode. Then, when the zone effect is executed in the first effect mode, it is changed to a blue background screen, and when the zone effect is executed in the second effect mode, it is changed to a red background screen. In this way, by changing the background screen, it is possible to suggest that the pending storage with high expectations is stored, and it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

In the zone effect determination process (S166), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the zone effect selection table and zone effect shown in FIG. 26 based on the variation category specified by the variation category command transmitted from the main board 11. Based on the determination random number value MR13, it is determined whether or not the zone effect is to be executed and the effect mode when the zone effect is to be executed.

After executing the zone effect determination process (S166), the effect control CPU 120 stores the determination content of the zone effect determination process based on the determination result of the zone effect determination process (S167). For example, the CPU 120 for effect control, the buffer number of the first read-ahead notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number of the first start winning prize in the first start winning prize receiving command buffer 194A, or the second start winning prize receiving command buffer 194B. The determination content (effect mode) of the zone effect determination process is stored in association with the buffer number of the second prefetching notice buffer 194D corresponding to the buffer number of the second start winning prize in. Note that the determination content (production mode) of the zone effect determination process stored in the first prefetching notice buffer 194C or the second prefetching notice buffer 194D is deleted in the process of S536 described below. Further, in the process of S536, a process of changing the background screen of the image display device 5 to the normal mode is also executed when the determination content (effect mode) of the zone effect determination process is deleted.

After executing the process of S167, the effect control CPU 120 executes a process of changing the background screen of the image display device 5 based on the effect mode determined in the zone effect determination process (S166) (S168). For example, when it is determined that the zone effect is to be executed in the first effect mode, it is changed to a blue background screen, and when it is determined that the zone effect is to be executed in the second effect mode, it is changed to a red background screen.

If it is determined in S166 that the zone effect is not executed, the processes of S167 and S168 may be omitted. In addition, when the zone effect is already being executed, the processes of S166 to S168 may be omitted and a new zone effect may not be executed. When the zone effect is being executed in the first effect mode, in the zone effect determining process (S166), it is determined that the zone effect is to be executed in the second effect mode, that is, in the effect mode with higher expectations. The zone effect may be newly executed only when it is determined to. In this case, the blue background screen is changed to the red background screen. Further, the background screen may be changed as a zone effect so that the player can recognize the pending storage of the notice target, and the countdown display may be displayed until the change of the notice target is started. For example, the number of times the change of the notice target is executed may be displayed on the image display device 5 every time the change before the change of the notice target ends.

After executing the winning effect determination process of S150 shown in FIG. 22 and FIG. 23, for example, depending on the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191, the following S170 to 177 Select and execute one of the processes.

The variable display start waiting process of S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" which is the initial value. This variable display start waiting processing is based on whether or not the first variation start command (or second variation start command), variation pattern designation command, variable display result notification command, etc. transmitted from the main board 11 are received. It includes a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the display device 5. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1".

The variable display start setting process of S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". This variable display start setting process corresponds to the variable display of the special symbol being started in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the decorative symbol in the image display device 5. Process to determine the fixed decorative symbol according to the variation pattern of the special symbol and the type of the display result in order to perform the variable display and other various production operations, and the first hold display or the second hold display is shifted to be active. Processing for displaying a special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the first hold display or the second hold display in the display area AHA, various effects and effect modes of various effects (for example, active display change effect, normal It includes a process of determining an expectation effect, an effect mode of the high expectation effect, and the like. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2".

The variable display effect process in S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In the effect display during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 based on the effect control pattern determined in the variable display start setting process. Then, various control data are read out, and various effect control (for example, variable display control of decorative design during variable display of decorative design) is performed. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a video signal (effect image) to the image display device 5 for display on the screen based on the read control data, and outputs an effect sound signal to the voice control board 13. Then, various effect controls such as a control for outputting an effect sound from the speaker 8 and a control for outputting an illumination signal to the lamp control board 14 to turn on/off/blink the lamp 9 are executed.

After performing such effect control, for example, in response to the fact that the end code indicating the variable display end of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. , The fixed decorative design as the final stopped design resulting in the variable display of the decorative design is completely stopped and displayed. If the fixed decorative pattern is completely stopped and displayed in response to the end code being read from the effect control pattern, when the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command has elapsed, Even if the production control command from the main board 11 is not used, the final display pattern can be autonomously derived and displayed on the side of the production control board 12 to confirm the variable display result. When the fixed decorative pattern is completely stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3".

The special figure waiting process in S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3". In the special figure winning wait process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. Then, when the hit start designation command is received, if the hit start designation command designates the start of the big hit gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is "6" which is a value corresponding to the big hit mid effect processing. To update. On the other hand, when the hit start designation command is received, if the hit start designation command designates the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hit. Is updated to "4". When the effect control process timer times out without receiving the hit start designation command, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is "miss", and the value of the effect process flag is the initial value. Update to "0".

The effect process during small hit in S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "4". In the effect processing during the small hit, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, reads various control data based on the setting contents, and changes in S172. Similar to the display effect during display, by outputting a video signal, an effect sound signal, an illumination signal, etc., various effect controls in the small hitting game state are executed. In addition, in the small hit mid effect production process, for example, in response to receiving a hit end designation command from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "5" which is a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. ..

The small hit end production process of S175 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hitting end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and reads out various control data based on the setting contents, and the variable of S172. Similar to the during-display effect process, by outputting a video signal, an effect sound signal, an illumination signal, etc., various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state are executed. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0".

The big hit mid-game production process of S176 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "6". In this big hit mid effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit game state, based on the setting contents, various control data is read out and variable display in S172 is being performed. Similar to the effect process, by outputting a video signal, effect sound signal, electric decoration signal, etc., various effect controls in the big hit game state are executed. Further, in the big hit midfield effect process, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "7" which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving the hit end designation command from the main board 11, for example.

The ending effect process of S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and reads out various control data based on the setting contents, and the variable display effect in S172. Similar to the processing, by outputting a video signal, a performance sound signal, an electric signal, etc., various performance controls at the end of the big hit game state are executed. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0".

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S171 of FIG. 22 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 27, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and the special figure display result is “missed”. It is determined whether or not (S522). When it is determined that the special figure display result is “miss” (S522; Yes), the specified variation pattern is obtained by reading the EXT data in the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, for example. It is a non-reach variation pattern (that is, "PA1-1" "PA2-1" "PA2-2" "PA2-3" in FIG. 5) corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach". It is determined whether or not (S523).

When it is determined in S523 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (S523; Yes), the combination of the fixed decorative symbols which are the final stop symbols forming the non-reach combination is determined (S524). As an example, in the process of S524, first, the numerical data indicating the random number value for the left definite symbol determination updated by the random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in the ROM 121 or the like in advance. By referring to a predetermined left fixed design determination table, the left fixed decorative design to be stopped and displayed in the "left" decorative design display area 5L in the display area of the image display device 5 of the fixed decorative design is determined.

Next, the numerical data showing the random number value for the right fixed symbol determination that is updated by the random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and the predetermined right fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to, etc., the right fixed decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative pattern display area 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 among the fixed decorative patterns is determined. At this time, the design number of the right fixed decorative design may be determined to be different from the design number of the left fixed decorative design by the setting in the right fixed design determination table. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value for medium-decision symbol determination updated by the random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and the predetermined medium-determination symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to, etc., the middle fixed decorative design which is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative design display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 of the fixed decorative designs is determined. In the process of S524, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination that is the predetermined chance eye symbol may be determined corresponding to the case where the variable symbol announcement is being executed.

When it is determined in S523 that the pattern is not the non-reach variation pattern (S523; No), the combination of the fixed decorative symbols which is the final stop symbol forming the reach combination is determined (S525). As an example, in the process of S525, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left/right fixed symbols updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined left and right finalized symbol determination table, etc., the symbols that are stopped and displayed together in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 among the finalized decorative symbols Determine the decorative pattern with the same number. Furthermore, the numerical data indicating the random number value for medium fixed symbol determination that is updated by the random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and the predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is displayed. By referring to the determined decorative design, the medium fixed decorative design stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative design display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined.

Here, in the case where the fixed decorative design is a big hit combination, for example, when the design number of the medium fixed decorative design is the same as the design number of the left fixed decorative design and the right fixed decorative design, an arbitrary value is set. By adding or subtracting (for example, “1”) to the symbol number of the medium fixed decorative design, the fixed decorative design may be a reach combination instead of a big hit combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium fixed decorative design, the difference between the left fixed decorative design and the right fixed decorative design (symbol difference) is determined, and the medium fixed decorative design corresponding to the design difference may be set. ..

When it is determined in S522 that the special figure display result is not "miss" (S522; No), the special figure display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probable", or the special figure display result is " It is determined whether it is a "small hit" or other cases (S526). When it is determined to be a "probability" or a "small hit" (S526; Yes), for example, a final decorative design that is the final stop design corresponding to the "probable" or "small hit" such as the opening chance. Is determined (S527). In this case, numerical data indicating a random number value for chance chance determination, which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193, is extracted, and a predetermined chance eye determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to, etc., the combination of the fixed decorative symbols forming any one of the opening chances may be determined.

When it is determined in S526 that it is a "non-probable change" or a "probable change" other than the "probability" or "small hit" (S526; No), the combination of the final decorative design which is the final stop design forming the big hit combination is determined. Yes (S528). As an example, in the process of S528, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the jackpot confirmed symbol updated by a random counter or the like of the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and subsequently, a predetermined value stored in the ROM 121 or the like in advance. By referring to the jackpot confirmation symbol determination table, etc., the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 The decorative pattern with the same number is determined. At this time, depending on whether the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probable change”, whether or not promotion effect during the big hit, and the like, a different decorative design may be determined to be the fixed decorative design.

As a specific example, when the jackpot type is "non-probable variation", any one of the plurality of normal symbols is selected as a decorative design, and the non-probable variation jackpot combination is determined to be a determined decorative design. Good. Further, when the jackpot type is "probability variation", any one of the decorative patterns is selected from a plurality of types of regular symbols or probability variation symbols, and a definite variation jackpot combination or a definite variation jackpot combination is formed. You can decide to. At this time, when it is determined to be a fixed decorative pattern of a non-probability variation big hit combination, the notification that the probability variation state is controlled in the re-lottery effect in the variable display is not given, and it is executed corresponding to the big hit game state. It is only necessary to be informed that it is controlled to be in the probable state by a promotion effect during a big hit. On the other hand, when the confirmed decorative pattern of the probability variation big hit combination is determined, in the re-lottery effect that is variably displayed or without executing the re-lottery effect, the notification that the probability variation state is controlled is given.

When it is specified in the process of S513 in the command analysis process of FIG. 21 that the time is not shortened (S155: NO), the hold digestion process is executed after executing any of the processes of S524, S525, S527, and S528. Yes (S531). Specifically, the active display corresponding to the fluctuation is displayed in the active display area AHA (in other words, the special image including the active display corresponding to the fluctuation is displayed). For example, when the variation of the decorative design is started in conjunction with the first special drawing game (when the variable display of the decorative design this time is linked to the first special drawing game), the first start winning prize memory display area The active display corresponding to the hold display displayed on the right end of the 5HL is displayed in the active display area AHA (the special image including the active display corresponding to the hold display displayed on the right end of the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL). Is displayed). More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 moves the active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL to the active display area AHA to display the active display. Is set as a usage pattern, and the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. The active display area AHA displays the active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the area 5HL. In addition, in this embodiment, the active display in the active display area AHA is displayed in the same manner as the hold display, but is not limited to this, and is displayed in a display manner corresponding to the hold display but different from the hold display. Good. The same applies when the variation of the decorative design is started in conjunction with the second special figure game.

In the process of S531, the effect control CPU 120 first starts the other hold display when there is a hold display in addition to the hold display (active display) to be exhausted in the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL. If there is a hold display in addition to the active display in the second start prize storage display area 5HR, the other hold display is shifted in the second start prize storage display area 5HR.

After executing the process of S531, the effect execution setting process is executed (S532). In the effect execution setting process (S532), when the hold display is determined to be “sphere”, the process of determining whether or not to execute the active display change effect for the active display corresponding to the variation, The process of determining the type of active display change effect, the process of determining the effect mode of the active display change effect when executing, the process of determining the execution timing of the active display change effect when executing, and these processing results A process for setting (or resetting) the effect control pattern based on the original is included.

Further, in the effect execution setting process (S532), when the newly displayed hold display is determined to be a display form having an icon shape such as a character icon or a character icon, a display form change effect execution timing selection process, It further includes a display mode change effect type selection process, an icon effect setting process for executing the change mode selection process, and a process for setting (or resetting) an effect control pattern based on these process results.

The display mode change effect execution timing selection process is the execution timing of the display mode change effect (the hold display mode change effect or the variation-corresponding display mode change effect) corresponding to the hold storage in which the hold display is performed in the character icon or the icon shape of the character icon. Is a process of selecting and determining. As shown in FIGS. 28B and 28C, the execution timing of such a hold display is, for example, during the hold display after the first hold display shift after the hold display corresponding to the hold storage appears. And the timing during active display corresponding to the pending storage.

In the display mode change effect type selection process, the type of the display mode change effect (hold display mode change effect or variation-corresponding display mode change effect) of the "character" or "character" icon shape is displayed for hold display or active display. Processing. As shown in FIGS. 28D, 28E, etc., the type of such display mode change effect is selected and determined from one of the first change effect to the fourth change effect.

In the change mode selection process, a display mode change effect (a hold display mode change effect or a change-corresponding display mode change effect) of a display of an icon shape of “character” or “character” is selected and determined for a hold display or an active display. Processing. As shown in FIGS. 28(F) to (M) and the like, the representation mode of the character icon display mode change effect (holding display mode change effect or variation-corresponding display mode change effect) is displayed as "no change" and "opportunity". And "Intense heat" are displayed. The effect mode of the character icon display mode change effect (holding display mode change effect or change-corresponding display mode change effect) is selected and determined to be “no change”, “two people” display, or “three people” display. It

Further, the effect execution setting process (S532) further includes a notice effect setting process relating to the notice effect corresponding to the change other than the active display change effect. The notice production setting process is a process of determining the manner of the notice production of the normal expectation and the notice production of the high expectation having a higher expectation than the normal expectation.

After the process of S532 is executed, the execution setting of the other variable display is performed (S533). As an example, in the process of S533, the execution setting of "one-shot notification effect" may be performed to immediately notify (deterministically notify) that the variable display result will be "big hit" due to the big hit notification sound or the big hit notification light emission. .. An example of the big hit notification sound is an alarm sound, a chime sound, a siren sound, or the like. An example of the big hit notification light emission is light emission of a flash lamp that constitutes the light emitting member 9CC. Further, in the process of S533, regardless of whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit", for example, it may be set so that the effect of a predetermined mode is executed for bustling. For example, the effect may be set such that a predetermined lamp 9 (for example, the light emitting members 9SL and 9SR) emits light.

After the process of S533 is executed, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 is set corresponding to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command, for example (S534). Subsequently, a variable display start setting process for setting a change of the decorative pattern or the like on the image display device 5 is executed (S535). For example, by transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data, which is included in the effect control pattern set as the use pattern in the effect execution setting process of S532, to the VDP of the display control unit 123, or the like. The sound output from the speaker 8 is performed by setting to start the variation of the decorative pattern on the screen of No. 5 and transmitting the effect sound signal specified by the sound control data included in the effect control pattern to the sound control board 13. Settings for starting the light emission, and setting for starting the light emission of the lamp 9 are performed by transmitting an illumination signal specified by the lamp control data included in the effect control pattern to the lamp control board 14.

After the processing of S535 is executed, the command stored in the first start-up winning prize reception command buffer 194A or the second start-winning prize reception command buffer 194B is consumed (S536). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 has the smallest command among the commands associated with the first start prize-winning reception command buffer 194A when the variable display of the decorative design is started in synchronization with the first special figure game. The command (1 set) stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number that is larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (the first start mouth prize designation command The command associated with is shifted while maintaining the winning order.When the variable display of the decorative pattern is started in synchronization with the second special figure game, it is stored in the second start winning time received command buffer. The command (1 set) stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command is won. Shift while maintaining the order.

Further, in the process of S536, the information stored in the first prefetching notice buffer 194C or the second prefetching notice buffer 194D provided in the RAM 122 or the like is also deleted or shifted according to the deletion or shift of the command. In the process of S536, the background of the image display device 5 is deleted when deleting the determination content (effect mode) of the zone effect determination process stored in the first prefetching notice buffer 194C or the second prefetching notice buffer 194D. The process of changing the screen to the normal mode is also executed. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2" which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (S537), and the variable display start setting processing is ended.

Here, the effect execution setting process (S532) will be described in detail. First, a process of deciding whether to execute the active display change effect for the active display corresponding to the variation, and a process of deciding the type of the active display change effect when it is decided to execute the active display change effect (which active A process of determining whether to execute the display change effect) will be described.

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an effect pattern table during hold selection. In particular, FIG. 28A shows an example of setting the determination ratio based on the active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table. In addition, FIGS. 28B to 28M show the display mode change effect execution timing selection process and the display mode change effect type selection when the hold display is determined to be the display mode of the icon shape such as the character icon or the character icon. It is various data tables used for processing and icon effect setting processing for executing change mode selection processing.

Specifically, in the setting example of FIG. 28A, when the display mode of the hold display is determined to be “sphere”, whether or not to execute the active display change effect, the type of the active display change effect (which It is an example of setting the determination rate of the effect mode of the active display change effect when executing the active display change effect. In the active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table, the numerical values (decision values) to be compared with the random number value MR7 (not shown) for determining the presence/absence of execution of the active display change effect are “execution performed” and “execution not performed”. 28 are assigned at a determined rate as shown in FIG. Further, in the “execution” of the active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table, the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR7 for determination (not shown) is “first system change effect” and “first system change effect”. Each of the "second system change effect" and the "first system change effect and second system change effect" is assigned at a determined ratio as shown in FIG. 28(A). Further, the first system change effect includes a plurality of types of effect modes having similar effect modes. The second system change effect includes a plurality of types of effect modes having similar effect modes. Specifically, the first system change effect is an effect that affects the display mode of the active display, and the second system change effect is an effect that affects the display mode of the active display frame. The target acting on the second system change effect is different.

It should be noted that "execution available" and "first system change effect" indicate that the first system change effect is performed as an active display change effect, and "execution enabled" and "second system change effect" indicate the second system change effect. This means that it is performed as an active display change effect, and “execution performed”, “first system change effect and second system change effect” means that both the first system change effect and the second system change effect are changed by active display. Indicates that it will be performed as an effect. Further, "no execution" represents that the active display change effect is not performed. Further, the fluctuation pattern 1-X represents the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 shown in FIG. 5, and the fluctuation pattern PA2-X represents any of the fluctuation patterns PA2-1, PA2-2, PA2-3 shown in FIG. , The fluctuation pattern PA3-X represents one of the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 shown in FIG. 5, and the fluctuation pattern PA4 represents the fluctuation patterns PA4-1, PA4-2, PA4-3 shown in FIG. Indicates any one of PA4-4. The same applies to the fluctuation patterns PA5-X, PB4-X, PB5-X.

According to FIG. 28A, when the variation pattern (variable display pattern) of the variation (variable display) designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation patterns PA1-X and PA2-X, “no execution is performed”. Is 100%, which means that neither the first system change effect nor the second system change effect is executed. That is, when the variation is non-reach (miss), the active display change effect is not executed.

When the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation patterns PB3-X, PB4-X, PB5-X, the fluctuation patterns PA3-X, PA4-X, PA5-X are used. Compared to some cases, the rate of determining “no execution” is low. That is, the rate at which the active display change effect is executed when the "big hit" in the variation is higher than the rate at which the active display change effect is executed when the "loss" occurs in the variation. That is, when the active display change effect is executed, the degree of expectation of a “big hit” is higher than when the active display change effect is not executed.

When the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation patterns PB3-X, PB4-X, PB5-X, it is the fluctuation patterns PA3-X, PA4-X, PA5-X. Compared to the case, the ratio of determining “first system change effect and second system change effect” when “execution is performed” is higher. For example, in the case of the variation pattern PB3-X, the proportion of the "first system change effect and the second system change effect" that is determined when "executed" is determined is about 57% (40/70). On the other hand, in the case of the variation pattern PA3-X, the proportion of the “first system change effect and the second system change effect” determined when “execution performed” is about 33% (10÷30). Is. Alternatively, in more detail, which of the fluctuation patterns PA3-X to PA5-X the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is, or which of the fluctuation patterns PB3-X to PB5-X. The difference (or ratio) in the ratios for determining the "first system change effect and the second system change effect" is the change pattern PA3-X to PA5- when the change pattern of the change specified by the change pattern specifying command is It is larger than the difference in the proportions in which the “first system change effect” or the “second system change effect” is determined depending on which of X and the variation patterns PB3-X to PB5-X. For example, when the change pattern is PB3-X, the proportion of "first system change effect and second system change effect" is determined, and when it is the change pattern PA3-X, "first system change effect and second system change effect". While the difference with the proportion in which the "production" is determined is 30% (40%-10%), the proportion and the variation pattern in which the "first system change presentation" is determined when the variation pattern is PB3-X. The difference from the rate at which the "first system change effect" is determined when it is PA3-X is 5% (15%-10%). That is, when the first system change effect and the second system change effect are executed, the degree of expectation of a "big hit" is higher than when not.

If the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation patterns PA4-X, PA5-X, PB4-X, PB5-X, it is the fluctuation patterns PA3-X, PB3-X. Compared with the case, the rate of determining “no execution” is low. In other words, the rate at which the active display change effect is executed when the change reaches the super reach is higher than the rate at which the active display change effect is executed when the change reaches the normal reach. That is, when the active display change effect is executed, the degree of expectation of super-reach is higher than when the active display change effect is not executed.

Similarly, when the first system change effect and the second system change effect are executed, the degree of expectation of super-reach is higher than when not.

FIG. 28B is a character hold display change effect timing selection table used when the hold display is determined to be the display mode of the character icon. In FIG. 28(B), the selection of the relationship that the random number value MR10 for determining the display mode change effect timing is "holding display>active display in progress" at two types of display mode change effect timings, that is, during hold display and during active display. Allocated in proportion.

FIG. 28C is a character hold display time change effect timing selection table used when the hold display is determined to be the display mode of the character icon. In FIG. 28C, the random number value MR10 for selecting the display mode change effect timing is selected at a selection ratio of the relationship of "hold display<active display in progress" at two types of change effect timings, that is, hold display and active display. Allocated.

According to FIGS. 28B and 28C, when the hold display is in the character icon display mode, the hold display is more active than the character icon display mode than in the active display. Also, the display mode change effect is highly executed. On the other hand, when the hold display is in the character icon display mode, the display mode change effect is executed in the active display more than in the hold display than when the hold display is the character icon display mode. Is high. This allows the player to pay attention to the display type (for example, the display type of a character icon or a character icon) of the change target of the display mode change effect and the timing of the change of the display mode (for example, the timing of holding display or active display). It is possible to improve the interest of the game with respect to the effect of changing the mode of the hold display.

Regarding the display of the character icon and the display of the character icon, as shown in FIGS. 28F to 28M described later, the ratio of the actual display mode change after the display mode change effect is displayed is the pending display. Equal for medium and active display. Therefore, when the hold display is the display mode of the character icon, the display mode change effect is higher in the hold display than in the active display, as compared with the display mode of the character icon, When the hold display is the display mode of the character icon, the proportion of the display mode change effect being executed is higher in the active display than in the hold display, as compared with when the hold display is the display mode of the character icon. Based on the above, depending on whether the hold display is displayed as a character icon display or a character icon display, the frequency of changing the icon display mode is different between the hold display and the active display. Therefore, the ratio of selecting whether to change the display mode between the hold display and the active display is different. Thereby, with respect to the change of the display mode of the hold display and the display mode of the active display which are displayed in the icon shape, the player can be made to pay attention to the display type of the change target and the timing of the display mode change. The interest of the game can be improved about the change of.

FIG. 28D is a character hold change effect type selection table used when the hold display is determined to be the display mode of the character icon. As a type of change effect when the hold display by the character icon is executed, a blue arrow as shown in FIG. 37 acts on the hold display or the active display (may be referred to as a blue effect), ie, a first change effect. , A second change effect in which a red arrow as shown in FIG. 37 acts on the hold display or the active display (may be referred to as a red effect) is provided selectably. The selection ratio of the change mode of the icon display after the display mode change effect is different between the first change effect and the second change effect, and for example, the second change effect (red effect) is the first change effect (blue effect). ), the selection ratio of the change mode having a higher expectation of a big hit is set higher (see FIGS. 28F to 28I). In FIG. 28D, the random number value MR11 for selecting the display mode change effect type is allocated to the first change effect and the second change effect at the selection ratio of the relationship of "first change effect=second change effect". Has been.

FIG. 28E is a character hold change effect type selection table used when the hold display is determined to be the display mode of the character icon. As the type of display mode change effect when the hold display by the character icon is executed, a blue arrow as shown in FIG. 37 acts on the hold display or the active display (may be referred to as blue effect), third change An effect and a fourth change effect in which a red arrow as shown in FIG. 37 acts on the hold display or the active display (may be referred to as red effect) are provided selectably. The third change effect and the fourth change effect differ in the selection ratio of the change mode of the icon display after the display mode change effect is executed. For example, the fourth change effect (red effect) is the third change effect (blue effect). ), the selection ratio of the change mode having a higher expectation of a big hit is set to be higher (see FIGS. 28(J) to (M)). In FIG. 28(E), the random number value MR11 for selecting the display mode change effect type is allocated to the third change effect and the fourth change effect at the selection ratio of the relationship of "third change effect=fourth change effect". Has been.

28F to 28I are display mode change effect timings and display modes that are selected and determined by the data tables of FIGS. 28B and 28D for the change effect of the hold display by the character icon. It is a change selection table used when selecting and determining the change mode of the icon display for each combination with the change effect type. In these change selection tables, the change mode is divided into "no change", "opportunity" display, and "intense heat" display depending on whether the display result of the variable display is the big hit display result or the lost display result. The random number MR12 for selection is allocated at different selection ratios.

FIG. 28F is a first change effect pending display change selection table used when the display mode change effect timing is selected and determined as being in the pending display and the display mode change effect type is selected and determined as the first change effect. is there. FIG. 28G is a first change effect active display change selection table used when the display mode change effect timing is selected and determined as active display and the display mode change effect type is selected and determined as the first change effect. is there. FIG. 28H is a second change effect pending display change selection table used when the display mode change effect timing is selected and determined during the hold display and the display mode change effect type is selected and determined as the second change effect. is there. FIG. 28(I) is a second change effect active display change selection table used when the display mode change effect timing is selected and determined during active display and the display mode change effect type is selected and determined as the second change effect. is there.

28(F) to (I), “no change” indicates a mode in which the character icon does not change, and “opportunity” display indicates a mode in which the character icon changes to an icon having the character “opportunity”. The "hot heat" display indicates that the character icon changes to an icon having the character "hot heat".

In FIGS. 28F to 28I, the random number value MR12 for change selection is "no change <opportunity + intense heat (changed)" when the big hit display result is displayed, and "changed" when the loss display result is displayed. None> Opportunity + Intense heat (changes)” is allocated by the selection ratio. In addition, in FIGS. 28F to 28I, the random number value MR12 is selected at the selection ratio of the relationship of "opportunity <extreme heat" when the big hit display result is obtained and "opportunity> intense heat" when the loss display result is obtained. Allocated. As a result, when the character icon changes, the expectation of a big hit display result is higher than when the character icon does not change. In addition, when the character icon changes to “intense heat”, the expectation of a big hit display result is higher than when the character icon changes to “opportunity”.

28(G) and (I), which are used when the display mode change effect timing is selected and determined during active display, when the display mode change effect timing is displayed by the character icon, the display mode change effect timing is selected during the hold display. Compared to FIGS. 28F and 28H used when the determination is made, when the big hit display result is obtained, the selection ratio of the “intense heat” display is set higher.

With such a setting, for the character icon display, as shown in FIGS. 28(B) and 28(C), the ratio of selecting the change in the display mode of the character icon is lower than that in the hold display during the active display. When the jackpot display result is displayed, the percentage of selection of the display mode change to be the "intense heat" display, which has a higher expectation level that the jackpot is higher than the "opportunity" display, is higher than that in the hold display during the active display. high. Thereby, the player can be made to pay more attention to the display mode change mode of the icon display based on the display type of the display mode change target and the selected change timing.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 28F to 28I, when the jackpot display result is obtained, the second change effect (red effect) is more likely than the first change effect (blue effect). There is a high proportion of "heat (changed)" indications. As a result, when "opportunity or intense heat (with change)" is displayed by the second change effect (red effect), "opportunity or intense heat (with change)" is displayed by the first change effect (blue effect). The expectation of a big hit display result is higher than that when the player wins, and the player's expectation for the big hit can be increased.

In addition, the first change effect (blue effect) and the second change effect (red effect) differ in the ratio of "opportunity or intense heat (changed)" displayed, so that the pending display of the icon display, Alternatively, the player can be made to pay attention to the change mode during active display, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

FIGS. 28(J) to 28(M) show display mode change effect timings selected and determined by the data tables of FIG. 28(B) and FIG. 28(D) for the display mode change effect of the hold display by the character icon. It is a change selection table used when selecting and determining the change mode of the icon display for each combination with the display mode change effect type. In these effect selection tables, when there is a big hit display result and when there is a lost display result, the change display is divided into "no change", "2 person" display, and "3 person" display. The random number MR12 for selection is allocated at different selection ratios.

FIG. 28(J) is a third change effect pending display change selection table used when the change effect timing is selected and determined as being in the pending display and the display mode change effect type is selected and determined as the third change effect. FIG. 28(K) is a third change effect active display change selection table used when the display mode change effect timing is selected and determined as being active displayed and the display mode change effect type is selected and determined as the third change effect. is there. FIG. 28L is a fourth change effect pending display change selection table used when the display mode change effect timing is selected and determined as being in the pending display and the display mode change effect type is selected and determined as the fourth change effect. is there. FIG. 28M is a fourth change effect active display change selection table used when the display mode change effect timing is selected and determined as active display and the display mode change effect type is selected and determined as the fourth change effect. is there.

28(J) to (M), "no change" indicates a mode in which the character icon does not change, and "2 person" display indicates a mode in which the character icon changes to an icon of "2 person". The "three people" display indicates that the character changes to an icon of "three people".

In FIGS. 28(J) to (M), the random value MR12 for change selection is “no change <2+3 (change)” when the big hit display result is displayed, and “change” when the loss display result is displayed. None> 2 + 3 (changes)” are allotted in the selection ratio. In addition, in 26(J) to (M), the random number value MR12 is selected in the selection ratio of the relationship of "2 person <3 person" when the big hit display result is obtained and "2 person> 3 person" when the lost display result is obtained. Are allocated. As a result, when the character icon changes, the degree of expectation of a big hit display result is higher than when the character icon does not change. Further, when the character icon changes to “3 people”, the expectation of a jackpot display result is higher than when the character icon changes to “2 people”.

28(J) and (L) used when the change effect timing is selected and determined during the hold display when the character display is performed by the character icon. When the change effect timing is selected and determined during the hold display. 28(K) and (M) used in FIG. 28, the selection ratio of “3 person” display is set to be higher when the big hit display result is obtained.

With such a setting, for the character icon display, as shown in FIGS. 28(B) and (C), the proportion of selection of the display mode change of the character icon during the hold display is lower than that during the active display. Ratio of selection of display mode change to “3 person” display, which has a higher expectation level for “bigger” than “2 person” display, when the big hit display result is displayed, compared to during active display Is high. Thereby, the player can be made to pay more attention to the display mode change mode of the icon display based on the display type of the display mode change target and the selected change timing.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 28(J) to (M), when the jackpot display result is obtained, the fourth change effect (red effect) is "two persons compared to the third change effect (blue effect). Or, there is a high percentage that "3 people (changed)" is displayed. As a result, when "2 or 3 people (with change)" is displayed by the fourth change effect (red effect), "2 or 3 people (with change)" is displayed by the third change effect (blue effect). The degree of expectation of a jackpot display result is higher than that when displayed, and the player's expectation of a jackpot can be increased.

In addition, since the ratio of "2 people or 3 people (changed)" is displayed in the third change effect (blue effect) and the fourth change effect (red effect), the pending display of the icon display is being performed. Or, the player can be made to pay attention to the change mode during active display, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

Not limited to the example of each table shown in FIG. 28, even if the display mode after change is the same, the degree of expectation may be different depending on the timing of change. For example, the expectation of a big hit is higher when the display changes to the "opportunity" display or the "two people" display during the hold display than when the display changes to the "opportunity" display or the "two people" display during the active display. You may Further, for example, the degree of expectation that a big hit will occur when the active display changes to the “heat” or “3 people” display rather than the “heat” display or the “3 people” display during the hold display. May be higher.

Here, returning to FIG. 27 again, the variable display start setting process will be further described. In the effect execution setting process (S532), the effect control CPU 120 may select the hold display with the character icon or the character icon from the hold display mode determination table of FIG. 25 as the newly displayed hold display. At this time, for example, as described with reference to FIGS. 28B to 28M, the process for realizing the display mode change effect with the effect contents selected and determined is executed. For example, when the display mode change effect timing is selected and determined as being on hold display in FIG. 28(B) or FIG. 28(C), in the variable display to be started from now on, after the hold display is shifted according to the hold exhaustion, As described above, the setting process is executed to execute the display mode change effect with the effect contents selected and determined.

On the other hand, in the effect execution setting process (S532), when the display mode change effect timing is selected and determined as being in active display in FIG. 28B or 28C, the active display corresponding to the pending storage to be effected is displayed. Until execution is performed, the data for specifying the effect content selected and determined as described above is associated with the data of the buffer number in the first start winning prize reception command buffer 194A corresponding to the reserved memory that is the effect target. The display mode change stored in the RAM 122 stores the active display change effect designating data that specifies execution of the display mode change effect and stores the data that specifies the effect contents selected and determined as described above. It is stored in the effect storage area. Then, in S532 of the effect execution setting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display to be started is a variable display corresponding to the pending storage of the effect target specified by the active effect change effect specification data. When it is determined that the display is a variable display corresponding to the pending storage of the effect target, the display mode change is performed during the active display based on the data specifying the effect content stored in the display mode change effect storage area. Run the performance.

By executing the process described above, in the effect execution setting process (S532), the display mode of the hold display is selected by the character icon or the character icon, and when the display mode change effect is executed, the display mode is changed. Performance execution setting process (S532) during the first pending display after the pending display to be changed appears or during the active display when the variable display based on the pending storage corresponding to the pending display is executed. The display mode change effect is executed based on the effect setting in (1).

Further, in the effect execution setting process (S532), the effect control CPU 120 determines the active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table and the random value MR7 for determining whether the active display change effect execution is performed for the hold display displayed as “sphere”. And the variation pattern (variable display pattern) of the variation (variable display) designated by the variation pattern designation command, whether or not to perform the active display variation effect. Which of the active display change effects is to be executed is determined from among the effect modes of the plurality of active display change effects.

Note that the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the active display change effect, and when it is determined to be “executed”, the “first system change effect”, the “second system change effect”, or the “first system change effect”. And the second system change effect" may be determined.

Next, in the case of active display (fluctuation) for executing the active display change effect, a process of determining the effect mode of the active display change effect to be executed will be described. FIG. 29(A) is a diagram showing a setting example of the determination ratio of the effect mode of the first system change effect when the first system change effect is executed as the active display change effect. FIG. 29B is a diagram showing a setting example of the determination ratio of the effect mode of the second system change effect when the second system change effect is executed as the active display change effect. Further, FIG. 29C shows the determination ratio of the effect mode of the first system change effect and the second system change effect when both the first system change effect and the second system change effect are executed as the active display change effect. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting.

In the illustrated example, the fluctuation pattern 1-X represents the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 shown in FIG. 5, and the fluctuation pattern PA2-X is any of the fluctuation patterns PA2-1, PA2-2, PA2-3 shown in FIG. 5, the fluctuation pattern PA3-X represents one of the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 shown in FIG. 5, and the fluctuation pattern PA4 represents the fluctuation patterns PA4-1, PA4-2 and PA4 shown in FIG. -3 or PA4-4. The same applies to the fluctuation patterns PA5-X, PB4-X, PB5-X.

It is assumed that the ROM 121 stores the active display change effect patterns as the effect modes of the four types of first system change effects corresponding to the 24 kinds of variation patterns shown in FIG. Further, it is assumed that the ROM 21 stores the active display change effect patterns as the effect modes of the three types of second system change effects corresponding to the 24 kinds of variation patterns shown in FIG. Further, the ROM 21 stores 12 types of active display change effect patterns as effect modes of the first system change effect and the second system change effect corresponding to the 24 kinds of variation patterns shown in FIG. To do.

The first system change effect is an effect effect that stimulates a change in the display mode of the active display for the active display, for example, an effect effect that changes the display shape of the active display. In FIG. 29(A), when the active display change effect pattern “BP1” is, by default, the display shape of the active display corresponding to the variation is “sphere”, the display shape of the active display is “sphere”. It is a production pattern of a failure production that does not change as it is (active display change gaze production). According to the illustrated example, when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach), the determination rate is higher than when the reach is hot (for example, super reach). Further, when the variation pattern is “miss” (for example, the variation pattern PA3-1), the determination rate is higher than that of the variation pattern (for example, the variation pattern PB3-1) that is “big hit”.

In addition, the active display change effect pattern “BP2” is an effect effect that changes the display shape of the active display corresponding to the change from the default display shape of “sphere” to the display shape of the active display of “triangle”. It is a pattern. According to the illustrated example, when the variation pattern is “miss” (for example, the variation pattern PA4-1), the determination rate is higher than that of the variation pattern (for example, the variation pattern PB4-1) that is “big hit”. high. Further, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the determination rate is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach).

In addition, the active display change effect pattern “BP3” is a success effect effect in which the display shape of the active display corresponding to the change is changed from the default display shape “sphere” to the display shape of the “pentagon” active display. It is a pattern. According to the illustrated example, when the variation pattern is “big hit” (for example, the variation pattern PB3-1), the determination rate is higher than that of the variation pattern that is “miss” (for example, the variation pattern PA3-1). Further, when the reach is hot (eg, super reach), the decision rate is higher than when the reach is not hot (eg, normal reach).

In addition, the active display change effect pattern “BP4” is an effect effect that changes the display shape of the active display corresponding to the variation from the default display shape of “sphere” to the active display shape of “star”. It is a pattern. According to the illustrated example, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the determination rate is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach). When the variation pattern is “big hit” (for example, variation pattern PB5-1), the determination rate is higher than that of the variation pattern (for example, variation pattern PA5-1) that is “miss”.

The second system change effect is an effect effect that fuels a change in the display mode of the active display frame targeting the active display frame, for example, an effect effect that fuels a change in the line thickness of the active display frame. In FIG. 29B, in the active display change effect pattern “CP1”, if the line thickness of the active display frame surrounding the active display corresponding to the variation is “normal” as a default, the active display frame is displayed. It is a production pattern of a failure production (active display change gall production) in which the thickness of the line is not changed as "normal". According to the illustrated example, when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach), the determination rate is higher than when the reach is hot (for example, super reach). Further, when the variation pattern is “miss” (for example, the variation pattern PA3-1), the determination rate is higher than that of the variation pattern (for example, the variation pattern PB3-1) that is “big hit”.

The active display change effect pattern "CP2" is a success effect effect pattern in which the thickness of the line of the active display frame surrounding the active display is changed from "normal" to "middle thick". According to the illustrated example, when the variation pattern is “miss” (for example, the variation pattern PA4-1), the determination rate is higher than that of the variation pattern (for example, the variation pattern PB4-1) that is “big hit”. high. Further, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the determination rate is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach).

The active display change effect pattern “CP3” is a success effect effect pattern in which the thickness of the line of the active display frame surrounding the active display corresponding to the change is changed from “normal” to “extremely thick”. According to the illustrated example, when the variation pattern is the “big hit” (for example, the variation pattern PB3-1), the determination rate is higher than that of the variation pattern that is the “miss” (for example, the variation pattern PA3-1). high. Further, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the determination rate is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach).

The first system change effect and the second system change effect include an action effect that fuels a change in the display mode of the active display by the above-described first system change effect and an active display that surrounds the active display by the above-described second system change effect. It is an action effect that performs both an action effect that fuels a change in the display mode of the frame. In FIG. 29C, the active display change effect pattern “AP1” has, as a default, the display shape of the active display corresponding to the variation is “sphere” and the thickness of the line of the active display frame surrounding the active display. Is "normal", the display shape of the active display remains "sphere" and the line thickness of the active display frame remains "normal". It is a pattern. According to the illustrated example, when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach), the determination rate is higher than when the reach is hot (for example, super reach). Further, when the variation pattern is “miss” (for example, the variation pattern PA3-1), the determination rate is higher than that of the variation pattern (for example, the variation pattern PB3-1) that is “big hit”.

Also, the active display change effect pattern “AP2” is a success in changing the display shape of the active display to “sphere” and changing the thickness of the line of the active display frame surrounding the active display from “normal” to “middle thick”. It is a production pattern of production. According to the illustrated example, when the variation pattern is “miss” (for example, the variation pattern PA4-1), the determination rate is higher than that of the variation pattern (for example, the variation pattern PB4-1) that is “big hit”. high. Further, when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach), the determination rate is higher than when it is the heat reach (for example, super reach).

Further, the active display change effect pattern “AP3” is a successful effect in which the display shape of the active display remains “sphere” and the line thickness of the active display frame surrounding the active display is changed from “normal” to “extremely thick”. Is a production pattern. When the variation pattern is “big hit” (for example, variation pattern PB3-1), the determination rate is higher than that for the variation pattern (for example, variation pattern PA3-1) that is “miss”. Further, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the determination rate is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach).

The active display change effect pattern “AP4” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “triangle” and the line thickness of the active display frame is not changed as “normal”. The effect pattern “AP5” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “triangle” and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to “middle thick”, and the active display change effect pattern “AP5” is used. "AP6" is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to "triangle" and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to "extremely thick".

The active display change effect pattern “AP7” is an effect pattern in which the active display display shape is changed to a “pentagon” and the line thickness of the active display frame is not changed to “normal”. The display change effect pattern “AP8” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “pentagon” and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to “middle thick”. The pattern “AP9” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “pentagon” and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to “extremely thick”.

In addition, the active display change effect pattern “AP10” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “star” and the line thickness of the active display frame is not changed as “normal”. The display change effect pattern “AP11” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “star” and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to “middle thick”. The pattern “AP12” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “star” and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to “extremely thick”.

That is, in the effect execution setting process (S532), the effect control CPU 120 uses the random value MR8 for determining the active display change effect pattern and the variation pattern (variable display) of the variation (variable display) designated by the variation pattern designation command. Display pattern), the active display change effect pattern is determined as the effect mode of the active display change effect when executing the active display change effect.

Next, a process of determining the timing of executing the active display change effect in the change will be described. FIG. 30 is a diagram showing an example of setting the determination rate by the effect execution timing determination table when executing the first system change effect. It should be noted that the ROM 121 stores a plurality of (for example, four) execution timings of the first system change effect according to the 24 types of variation patterns shown in FIG. 5 as the effect execution timings of the first system change effect. And The timing 1 is, for example, the timing at which the first system change effect is executed at the start of the change, the timing 2 is the timing at which the first system change effect is executed at the pseudo continuous change, and the timing 3 is. The timing at which the first system change effect is executed when the reach is established in the fluctuation, and the timing 4 is the timing at which the first system change effect is executed after the reach is established (during the reach) in the fluctuation. The pseudo continuous change is, for example, when the variable display being changed is temporarily stopped.

Further, the variation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 classified into “successful expectation level “small”” indicate that the expectation level at which the successful performance is executed is “small”, and “successful expectation level “medium”. The fluctuation patterns PA4-1 to PA4-4 and PA5-1 to PA5-4 classified into “are “medium” in which the degree of expectation that the success effect is executed is higher than the above-mentioned degree of success expectation “small”. Represents. In addition, the variation patterns PB3-1 and PB3-2 classified into “successfulness expectation “large”” are “large” in which the expectation that the successful performance is executed is higher than the success expectation “medium”. In the variation patterns PB4-1 to PB4-4 and PB5-1 to PB5-4, which are classified as “successful expectation “maximum””, the expectation that the successful performance is executed is the above-mentioned success expectation “large”. Is higher than the "maximum".

Specifically, in FIG. 29, fluctuation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 are active display change effect patterns BP1 that are failure effects of the first system change effect, and active displays that are failure effects of the second system change effect. Compared with the ratio determined by the change effect pattern CP1 and the active display change effect pattern AP1 which is the failure effect of the first system change effect and the second system change effect, the ratios determined by the other active display change effect patterns. The degree of success is high and the degree of success expectation at which the success effect can be executed is low, and is classified into “small degree of success expectation” as described above.

Further, in FIG. 29, variation patterns PA4-1 to PA4-4, PA5-1 to PA5-4, PB3-1 to PB3-2, PB4-1 to PB4-4 other than the variation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2. , PB5-1 to PA5-4, active display change effect patterns BP2 to BP4 which are successful effects of the first system change effect, active display change effect patterns CP2 to CP3 which are successful effects of the second system change effect, The ratios determined by the active display change effect patterns AP2 to AP12, which are successful effects of the first system change effect and the second system change effect, are higher than the rates determined by the other active display change effect patterns. The degree of success expectation that the successful presentation can be executed is higher than that of the variation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2. That is, the degree of expectation that the success effect can be executed is high due to the variation pattern as shown in FIG. 29.

In the illustrated example, the variation pattern (variable display pattern) of the variation (variable display) designated by the variation pattern designation command is not a pseudo-continuous variation, PA3-1, PA4-1, PA4-2, PA5. -1, PA5-2, PB3-1, PB4-1, PB4-2, PB5-1, PB5-2 indicate that the first system change effect is not executed at the timing 2. According to FIG. 30, when the hot reach (for example, super reach) is performed, the decision rate determined at an earlier timing (for example, timing 1) is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach). Further, in the case of the variation pattern of “big hit”, the determination rate determined at the later timing (eg, timing 4) of the first system change effect is higher than that of the variation pattern of “miss”. Further, after the reach is established (for example, timing 3 and timing 4), the degree of expectation of successful production is higher than that before the reach is established (for example, timing 1 and timing 2). Further, after the temporary stop of the variable display in the pseudo continuous fluctuation (for example, timing 3 and timing 4), the expectation of the successful effect is higher than that before the temporary stop of the variable display in the pseudo continuous fluctuation (for example, the timing 1).

That is, in the effect execution setting process (S532), the effect control CPU 120 causes the random number value MR9 for determining the item timing of the active display change effect and the variation pattern of the variation (variable display) designated by the variation pattern designation command. (Variable display pattern) determines the execution timing of the active display change effect when the active display change effect is executed.

At the timing 2, immediately after the start of the re-variable display, for example, at the start of the first re-variable display or the second re-variable display, depending on the number of temporary stoppages of the variable display in the pseudo continuous variation. May be determined as the execution timing of the first system change effect, or the execution timing of the first system change effect may be determined at the plurality of times of execution in a plurality of pseudo continuous fluctuations. Further, the timing 2 at the time of pseudo continuous fluctuation may be after the reach is established. For example, the execution timing is set such that the timing 2 at the time of pseudo continuous variation is set after the timing 3 at the time of reach establishment in FIG. Alternatively, a plurality of timings including four timings may be set as the execution timing of the first system change effect.

Also, an example of setting the determination rate of the effect mode of the first system change effect when executing the first system change effect as the active display change effect shown in FIG. 29 and the execution timing of the first system change effect shown in FIG. 30. The ROM 121 may be stored as one table by associating with and. The same applies to the execution timing of the second system change effect and the execution timing of executing both the first system change effect and the second system change effect.

The setting example (not shown) of the determination rate by the execution timing determination table of the second system change effect is the same as the setting example of the determination rate by the effect execution timing determination table at the time of the first system change effect execution as shown in FIG. The example may be the same or may be an example of setting the determination rate by the second system change effect execution timing determination table different from the example of setting the determination rate by the effect execution timing determination table when the first system change effect is executed.

When it is determined to execute the "first system change effect and the second system change effect" in FIG. 28, the execution timings of the first system change effect and the second system change effect are as shown in FIG. Using the example of setting the determination rate by the execution timing determination table, the first system change effect and the second system change effect may be collectively determined to be executed at the same timing. It may be collectively determined so that the respective execution timings of the system change production may be different execution timings. Further, when it is determined to execute the "first system change effect and the second system change effect" in FIG. 28, the respective execution timings of the first system change effect and the second system change effect are as shown in FIG. The execution timing of each of the first system change effect and the second system change effect may be determined separately by using an example of setting the determination ratio by the effect execution timing determination table.

Next, a process of setting (or resetting) the effect control pattern based on the selection result of the active display change effect will be described.

The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the active display change effect determined based on the change pattern specified by the change pattern specification command transmitted from the main board 11, and when executing the active display change effect, the active display change effect. The production pattern of the production and the execution timing of the active display change production are set as the production control pattern. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command as an effect control pattern, and effects corresponding to the effect mode of the selected active display change effect. Set the pattern as a production control pattern. If a plurality of effect control patterns corresponding to the change pattern designated by the change pattern designation command are prepared, one of them is selected and set as the effect control pattern. Then, the effect execution setting process (S532) ends. In this embodiment, the effect patterns corresponding to the normal expectation effect pattern and the high expectation effect pattern selected in the notice effect setting process described later are also set as effect control patterns.

Next, a specific example of control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. On the main board 11 side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the first starting condition is satisfied, the CPU 103 updates the first reserved memory number, and when the second starting condition is satisfied, the CPU 103 determines the second reserved memory number. Is updated (S215). The CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category (S217). The CPU 103 determines the special figure display result using the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the like (S403, S404). The CPU 103 determines the variation category based on the special figure display result, which is the determination result, the number of reserved memories updated in S215, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation category extracted in S217 (S412). The CPU 103 that has determined the variation category sets transmission of a variation category command that specifies the variation category that is the determination result (S413), and executes command control processing (S17). Thereby, the variation category command designating the variation category determined in S412 is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

On the side of the main board 11, when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the CPU 103, in the fluctuation pattern setting process (S111), first, the random value MR3 for fluctuation category determination extracted in S217. Without using, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category is extracted again, and the numerical value data indicating the random number value MR5 for determining the variation pattern is extracted. Subsequently, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern based on the newly extracted numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation category and the numerical data indicating the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern. The CPU 103 that has determined the fluctuation pattern sets transmission of a fluctuation pattern designation command that specifies the fluctuation pattern that is the determination result, and executes command control processing (S17). As a result, the variation pattern designation command or the like for designating the variation pattern determined in S111 is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

On the side of the effect control board 12 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the first start condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120, in the hold effect determination process (S160), the first start prize storage display area 5HL or the second start prize. The display mode of the hold display (additional display mode) when additionally displaying in the storage display area 5HR is determined. Further, the effect control CPU 120 causes the determination content of the hold effect determination processing (for example, the display mode at the time of addition) to be stored in the first readahead notification buffer 194C or the second readahead notification buffer based on the determination result of the hold effect determination processing. While storing (S161), the hold display is added to the first start winning a prize memory display area 5HL or the second starting award memory display area 5HR based on the stored contents (display mode at the time of addition) (S162).

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, when the first start condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the first prefetching notice buffer 194C or the second prefetching notice buffer 194D, and in the variable display, The effect control pattern is set on the basis of the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the substrate 11.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a display operation example in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (d) of FIG. 31A(A) and (e) to (g) of FIG. 31B(A) show scenes of the image display device 5 arranged in time series. .. The same applies to (a) to (d) of FIG. 31B and (e) to (g) of FIG. 31B(B). 31A and 31B, the arrow "↓" in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing. 31A (A) and FIG. 31B (A) show the success effects of the first system change effect and the second system change effect, and are shown in (C) of FIG. 29 as the effect mode of the active display change effect. It is assumed that the active display change effect pattern AP12 (changed (thickness “extremely thick”), changed (shape “star”)) is set. FIGS. 31A(B) and 31B(B) show failure effects of the first system change effect and the second system change effect, and the active display shown in FIG. 29(C) as an effect mode of the active display change effect. It is assumed that the change effect pattern AP1 (no change (shape “sphere”), no change (thickness “normal”)) is set.

In FIG. 31A(A), (a) shows an active display AH in the active display area AHA (active display obtained by moving a hold display corresponding to the variable display when the variable display is started to a predetermined active display area AHA, Alternatively, a special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL. It is a scene.

In the scene of FIG. 31A(A)(a), variable display of active information of the active display AH (information corresponding to the hold information immediately before the active display AH is displayed as the active display AH in the active display area AHA) is started. When making it, the CPU 120 for effect control starts the variation of the decorative pattern based on the variation pattern “PA2-1 (non-reach (miss))” designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11. After that, the fixed decorative design (“3”, “9”, “4”) is stopped and displayed.

In the scene of FIG. 31A(A)(b), the active display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 displayed in the first start prize winning memory display area is displayed in the active display area AHA, and the active display corresponding to the hold display H1 is displayed. It is an example when the variable display of AH is started.

In the scene of FIG. 31A(A)(b), the active display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 displayed in the first start prize winning memory display area is displayed in the active display area AHA, and the active display corresponding to the hold display H1 is displayed. It is an example when the variable display of AH is started. For example, in the scene of (b) of FIG. 31A (A), it is assumed that the active display AH is a change for executing the second system change effect. 31A(A)(c) shows a first system change effect and a second system change effect immediately after the variable display is started in the scene of FIG. 31A(A)(b) (for example, timing 1 in FIG. 30). Is an example of when is executed. In (c) of FIG. 31A (A), three figures (star Z1, triangle Z2, pentagon Z3) are displayed as a figure group Y1 in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 as the first system change effect, and the second system change is performed. As an effect, an arrow Y2 in which the character "intense heat" is drawn is displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 5. 31A(B)(a) to 31A(B)(c) are the same as (a) of FIG. 31A(A) to 31(A)(c). That is, the first system changes from (b) of FIG. 31A(A) to (c) of FIG. 31A(A) and from (b) of FIG. 31A(B) to (c) of FIG. 31A(B). It is a common effect that is commonly executed for the success effect and the failure effect in the effect and the second system change effect.

Then, in the scene (d) of FIG. 31A (A), the graphic group Y1 which is the first system change effect displayed in the scene (c) of FIG. 30A (A) is directed toward the lower part of the image display device 5. The triangle Z2 disappears while moving, and the star Z1 and the pentagon Z3 continue to move. In addition, a scene in which the arrow Y2, which is the second system change effect displayed in the scene of (c) of FIG. 31A (A), moves toward the bottom of the image display device 5 and collides with the active display frame AHW. Is. Then, in the scene (e) of FIG. 31B (A), after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW in the scene (d) of FIG. 31A, the line thickness of the active display frame AHW is “ The display mode of "extremely thick" has changed. Further, in the scene (e) of FIG. 31A (A), the graphic group Y1 which is the first system change effect is further moved toward the lower part of the image display device 5 from the scene (d) of FIG. 31A (A). Of the star Z1 and the pentagon Z3 that form the graphic group Y1, the pentagon Z3 disappears and only the star Z1 continues to move.

In the scene (f) of FIG. 31B (A), the star Z1 that remains without disappearing in the graphic group Y1 that is the first system change effect displayed in the scene (e) of FIG. 30A (A) is displayed. This is a scene in which the image display device 5 further moves toward the lower part and collides with the active display AH. In the scene (g) of FIG. 31B (A), after the star Z1 that remains without disappearing in the figure group Y1 collides with the active display AH in the scene (f) of FIG. 31B, the active display AH The display shape is changed to "star". Then, in the scene of (g) of FIG. 31B (A), the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5L and the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5R are in the reach mode.

On the other hand, in the scene (d) of FIG. 31A (B), the arrow Y2 that is the second system change effect displayed in the scene (c) of FIG. 31A (B) moves toward the bottom of the image display device 5. Then, the scene is moving to the lower portion of the image display device 5 without colliding with the active display frame AHW. Further, in the scene (e) of FIG. 31A (B), the graphic group Y1 which is the first system change effect is further moved toward the lower part of the image display device 5 from the scene (d) of FIG. 31A (B). Of the star Z1 and the pentagon Z3 that form the graphic group Y1, the pentagon Z3 disappears and only the star Z1 continues to move. In the scene (f) of FIG. 31B (B), the star Z1 that remains without disappearing in the graphic group Y1 that is the first system change effect displayed in the scene (e) of FIG. 31A (B) is displayed. The scene further moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5, but disappears before colliding with the active display AH. In the scene of (g) of FIG. 31B (B), the active star A1 in the scene of (f) of FIG. 31B disappears without colliding with the active display AH. The display shape of the display AH is displayed in the display mode as it is as “sphere”. Further, in the scene (g) of FIG. 31B (B), the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display area 5L and the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display area 5R are in the reach mode.

(Modification) Note that the display mode of the hold display does not have to be the display mode showing the degree of expectation for the big hit shown in FIG. 25, and the normal mode (normal, default color) and the normal mode are available. May include different special aspects, and first special aspect and second special aspect which are different aspects from the normal aspect and the special aspect. This will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 32, 33 and 34.

For example, instead of the determination rate of the display mode of the hold display shown in FIG. 25, another setting example of the determination rate of the display mode of the hold display shown in FIG. 32 may be used. FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating another setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display. Note that the ROM 121 may store seven types of hold display mode determination tables according to the variation category. FIG. 32A shows a hold display mode selected when the variation category is “PA1 (shortening/non-reach loss)” or the variation category “PA2 (non-reach (loss))” among the seven types described above. It is a setting example (H-TBL1) of the determination rate of the display mode of the hold display by the determination table. FIG. 32B shows a setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PA3 (normal reach (miss))” among the above-mentioned seven types ( H-TBL 2). FIG. 32C shows the setting of the determination rate of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PA4 (super reach α (miss))” among the seven types described above. It is an example (H-TBL3).

FIG. 32D is a setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PA5 (super reach β (miss)” among the seven types described above. 32(E) is a display of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PB3 (normal reach (big hit))” among the above seven types. 32F is an example of setting the determination rate of the mode (H-TBL5), and is selected when the variation category is “PB4 (super reach α (big hit))” among the seven types described above. 32G is a setting example (H-TBL6) of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the display mode determination table, and the variation category “PB5 (super reach β (big hit)) among the above-described seven types. Is a setting example (H-TBL7) of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display according to the hold display mode determination table selected when "".

Comparing FIG. 32 with FIG. 25, it is different in that a part of the determination ratio for “white” in each of the hold display mode determination tables in FIG. 25 is assigned to “gray” in FIG. 32. Specifically, the determination ratio for “white” in each of the hold display mode determination tables is 4:1 for the “white” and “gray” determination ratios for each of the hold display mode determination tables of FIG. 32. This is a setting example in which the determined ratio is assigned as described above. In this setting example, “white” is a display mode (normal mode) of normal hold display, and “gray” is a special mode different from the normal mode. The special mode has the same degree of expectation for the big hit as the normal mode, but when the "gray" hold display becomes the active display, the percentage of executing the active display change effect that changes the display mode of the active display is It is a display mode indicating that it is high.

In the setting example, unlike the normal mode and the special mode, the expectation level for the big hit is different (for example, the expectation degree for the big hit is higher than the normal mode and the special mode), which is the first special mode, and the normal mode and Unlike the special mode, the expectation for the big hit is different (for example, the expectation for the big hit is higher than that of the first special mode), which is the second special mode, or the expectation for the big hit, unlike the normal mode and the special mode. The third special mode such as red, which has a different value (for example, the expectation for a big hit is higher than the second special mode), may be included.

For example, in the first hold effect determination process (S160), the effect control CPU 120 determines the plurality of hold display modes shown in FIG. 32 based on the change category designated by the change category command transmitted from the main board 11. The hold display mode determination table to be used is selected from the tables, and based on the selected hold display mode determination table and the random value MR6 for determining the display mode of the hold display, additional display is performed in the first start winning a prize memory display area 5HL. The display mode (display mode at the time of addition) of the hold display to be performed may be determined.

After executing the first hold effect determination process (S160), the effect control CPU 120 stores the determination content of the first hold effect determination process based on the determination result of the first hold effect determination process (S161). .. Specifically, for example, the effect control CPU 120 changes the display mode of the hold display in the first hold effect determination process to the first start prize-winning reception command buffer 194A corresponding to the buffer number of the first start prize. The determination content (display mode at the time of addition) of the first holding effect determination processing is stored in association with the buffer number of the prefetching announcement buffer 194C.

After executing the process of S161, the effect control CPU 120 displays the hold display determined in the first hold effect determination process (S160) (the first start prize in the first start winning combination reception command buffer 194A). Based on the display mode at the time of addition stored in association with the buffer number of the first read-ahead notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number of No. Suspension addition processing is executed (S162). More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first start winning award storage display area 5HL to display a hold display in the additional display mode stored in association with the buffer number of the first prefetching notice buffer 194C described above. By setting the control pattern as the use pattern and transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, the first hold effect The hold display according to the display mode at the time of addition determined in the determination processing is added to the first start winning a prize memory display area 5HL.

Then, in the process of S532 in the effect execution setting process of FIG. 27, a process of deciding whether or not to execute the active display change effect for the active display corresponding to the variation, or which active when changing the active display change effect is executed. A process for determining whether to execute the display change effect, and in the case of active display (variation) for executing the active display change effect, a process for determining the effect mode of the active display change effect to be executed and the active in the change. A process of determining the timing to execute the display change effect, a process of setting (or resetting) the effect control pattern based on the selection result of the active display change effect, and the like are executed.

Here, the effect execution setting process (S532) will be described in detail. First, a process of determining whether to execute an active display change effect for an active display corresponding to the variation, and a process of determining which active display change effect to execute when executing the active display change effect will be described. To do. When using the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display shown in FIG. 32, the active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table shown in FIG. 33 may be used instead of the active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table shown in FIG. 28. .. Here, the example of setting the determination rate by the active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table shown in FIG. 28 and the example of the determination rate by the active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table shown in FIG. The difference is that the setting example of the determination rate by another active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table is referred to depending on whether the display mode of the display is the special mode.

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing another example of setting the determination rate by the active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table. Specifically, FIG. 33(A) is an example of setting the determination rate by the active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table that is referred to when the display mode of the active display corresponding to the variation is not the special mode (gray). FIG. 33(B) is an example of setting the determination rate by the active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table that is referred to when the display mode of the active display corresponding to the variation is the special mode (gray). Each of the setting examples shown in FIGS. 33(A) and 33(B) is similar to the setting example shown in FIG. 28, whether or not to execute the active display change effect, and when executing the active display change effect. It is an example of setting the determination rate of the effect mode of the active display change effect. Each of the setting examples shown in FIGS. 33A and 33B is compared with a random number value MR7 (not shown) for determining whether or not to execute the active display change effect in the active/display change effect execution/non-execution determination table. Numerical values (determined values) are assigned to “executed” and “not executed” at determined rates as shown in FIGS. 33A and 33B, respectively. In addition, in the “execution” of the active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR7 (not shown) for determining active display change effect execution presence/absence is “first system 33A and FIG. 33B for each of "change effect", "second system change effect", and "first system change effect and second system change effect". Allocated in percentage.

It should be noted that "execution available" and "first system change effect" indicate that the first system change effect is performed as an active display change effect, and "execution enabled" and "second system change effect" indicate the second system change effect. This means that it is performed as an active display change effect, and “execution performed”, “first system change effect and second system change effect” means that both the first system change effect and the second system change effect are changed by active display. Indicates that it will be performed as an effect. Further, "no execution" represents that the active display change effect is not performed. Further, the fluctuation pattern 1-X represents the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 shown in FIG. 5, and the fluctuation pattern PA2-X represents any of the fluctuation patterns PA2-1, PA2-2, PA2-3 shown in FIG. , The fluctuation pattern PA3-X represents one of the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 shown in FIG. 5, and the fluctuation pattern PA4 represents the fluctuation patterns PA4-1, PA4-2, PA4-3 shown in FIG. Indicates any one of PA4-4. The same applies to the fluctuation patterns PA5-X, PB4-X, PB5-X.

According to FIG. 33, when the variation pattern (variable display pattern) of the variation (variable display) designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation patterns PA1-X and PA2-X, "no execution" is 100. %, which means that none of the first system change effect, the second system change effect, the first system change effect, and the second system change effect is executed. Further, when the active display change effect is executed (in the case of “execution performed” in FIG. 33A and FIG. 33B), when the hot reach (for example, super reach) is reached, the reach that is not hot (for example, normal reach). ), the rate at which the first system change effect is executed is higher than that in the second system change effect. Further, when the variation pattern is “big hit”, the proportion of the first system change effect being executed is higher than that of the second system change effect, compared to when the variation pattern is “miss”. Further, when the hot reach (for example, super reach) is performed, the ratio of both the first system change effect and the second system change effect is executed is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach). Further, when the variation pattern is "big hit", the ratio of execution of both the first system change effect and the second system change effect is higher than when "variable".

Further, depending on whether or not the active display corresponding to the change is in the special mode, the determination rate of whether or not the active display change effect is executed is different. If the active display corresponding to the change is the special mode, the change is The determination rate of the active display change effect being executed is higher than that in the case where the active display corresponding to is not a special mode. Further, a case where the special mode as shown in FIG. 28 is not considered, a case where the special mode as shown in FIG. 33A is considered and the active display corresponding to the variation is not the special mode, and FIG. When the active display corresponding to the variation is a special mode in consideration of the special mode as shown in FIG. 23 and the respective cases are compared, the determination rate by the active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table shown in FIG. , The determination rate according to the active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table shown in FIG. 28, and the determination rate according to the active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table shown in FIG.

That is, in the effect execution setting process (S532), the effect control CPU 120 specifies the active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table, the random value MR7 for determining whether the active display change effect execution is performed, and the variation pattern designation command. Whether to execute the active display change effect depending on the change pattern of the change (variable display) (variable display pattern), and when executing the active display change effect, among the effect modes of the plurality of active display change effects , Which active display change effect is to be executed is determined.

Note that the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the active display change effect, and when it is determined to be “executed”, the “first system change effect”, the “second system change effect”, or the “first system change effect”. And the second system change effect" may be determined.

The figure group Y1 displayed as the first system change effect may be determined such that the degree of expectation for a big hit changes depending on the combination of figures forming the figure group Y1. This will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a setting example of the determination ratio by the first system detailed pattern determination table when executing the first system change effect. In each setting example shown in FIG. 34, the first system detailed pattern determination table of the first system change effect has, for example, ten types of first system detailed patterns SHP1 corresponding to combinations of three figures of a triangle, a pentagon, and a star. ~ SHP10 is included. This first system detailed pattern is the case where only the first system change effect is executed (when it is determined to be one of the active display change effect patterns BP1 to BP4 in FIG. 29A), and the first system change effect. It is referred to when both the second system change effect is executed (when any one of the active display change effect patterns AP1 to AP12 in FIG. 29C is determined).

In this first system detailed pattern, the numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number value MR8 (not shown) for determining the first system detailed pattern is determined by the active display change effect pattern at a determination rate as shown in FIG. It is assigned.

It is assumed that the ROM 121 stores the first system detailed patterns as the effect modes of the 10 types of the first system change effects corresponding to the 16 types of active display change effect patterns shown in FIG.

In FIG. 34, the first system detailed pattern “SHP1” is an effect pattern when all the three figures forming the figure group Y1 are formed of triangles. According to the illustrated example, AP1 to AP3 and BP1 have a high determination rate determined when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach) in FIG. 29, and when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach), The determination rate determined by the first system detailed pattern SHP1 is higher than when hot reach (for example, super reach) is performed. Further, the active display change effect pattern determined in FIG. 29 determines the display mode of the active display corresponding to the variation, and the first system detail that can be the display mode of the active display corresponding to the determined variation. The pattern is determined.

Similarly, the first system detailed pattern "SHP2" is an effect pattern when the three figures forming the figure group Y1 are pentagons, triangles, and triangles, and the first system detailed pattern "SHP3" is a figure. The three patterns forming the group Y1 are effect patterns when the patterns are pentagons, pentagons, and triangles. In the first system detailed pattern "SHP4," the three patterns forming the figure group Y1 are pentagons, pentagons, and pentagons. The first system detailed pattern "SHP5" is a production pattern when three figures forming the figure group Y1 are composed of stars, triangles, and triangles. The detailed pattern "SHP6" is an effect pattern when the three figures forming the figure group Y1 are formed of stars, pentagons, and triangles, and the first system detailed pattern "SHP7" forms the figure group Y1. One figure is an effect pattern when it is composed of a star, a pentagon, and a pentagon. In the first system detailed pattern “SHP8”, the three figures that make up the figure group Y1 are composed of stars, stars, triangles, and triangles. The first system detailed pattern "SHP9" is a production pattern when the three figures configuring the figure group Y1 are composed of stars, stars, and pentagons, and the first system detailed pattern "SHP10". "Is an effect pattern when all of the three figures forming the figure group Y1 are formed of stars. According to the illustrated example, the degree of expectation that the success effect can be executed differs depending on the combination of the graphics forming the graphic group Y1.

In the case of considering the special mode as shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, when the active display change effect is executed for the active display corresponding to the hold display displayed in the special mode, the common effect described above is used. , A suggestive effect that suggests a success effect and a failure effect, and a suggestive effect that suggests an active display change effect for an active display corresponding to a hold display displayed in a special mode (for example, a success effect and a failure effect). The suggestive effect suggesting the common effect, which is commonly executed in and, may be executed in the same or different manners. In addition, when considering the special mode as shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the active display change effect with respect to the active display has been described. However, the display mode of the hold display displayed in the starting winning prize memory display area 5H is the special mode. In some cases, the hold change effect executed in the same or different effect mode as the active display change effect may be executed for the hold display displayed in the special mode.

In FIG. 34, of the group of figures Y1 initially displayed (combined), the figure to be deleted in the common effect may be deleted from the figure having the display mode of active display with low expectation. For example, when the first system detailed pattern SHP6 is determined as the successful effect, the display mode after the successful effect is executed in the figure group including the three figures of “star”, “pentagon”, and “triangle” Of the two other than the figure (for example, "pentagon"), the one with the lowest expected degree (for example, "triangle") is deleted first, and the figure with the next lowest expected degree (for example, "star") is deleted. If it is a failure effect, delete “triangle”, “pentagon”, and “star” in this order from the figure group consisting of three figures of “star”, “pentagon”, and “triangle”. Good.

FIG. 35 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the display mode change effect and the presence/absence of display mode change execution in the display mode change effect. FIG. 35(A) shows an example in which the display mode change is executed after the display mode change effect is executed for the pending display or the active display. FIG. 35B shows an example in which the display mode change is not executed after the display mode change effect is executed for the hold display or the active display.

As shown in FIGS. 35(A) and (B), as the display mode change effect that suggests that the display mode is changed for the hold display or the active display, the display mode of the target hold display or the active display is The same effect is executed regardless of whether or not it actually changes. Then, when “no change” is selected as the change effect mode as shown in FIGS. 28F to 28M, as shown in FIG. 35B, the pending display or the active display is targeted. After the display mode change effect is executed, the hold display or the active display is not changed. On the other hand, when "opportunity" display or "heat" display, "2 person" display or "3 person" display is selected as the change effect mode as shown in FIGS. 28(F) to (M) As shown in FIG. 35(A), after the display mode change effect targeted for the hold display or the active display is executed, the change of the hold display or the active display is executed. As described above, performing the display mode change effect of the hold display or the active display is different from performing the change of the hold display or the active display.

Next, a character icon selection table in which data for selecting a character icon used as the first specific display mode of the hold display or the active display is set, and a character used as the second specific display mode of the hold display or the active display. A character icon selection table in which data for selecting an icon is set will be described. These tables are stored in the RAM 122.

FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a character icon selection table and a character icon selection table. A character icon selection table is shown in FIG. 36(A), and a character selection table is shown in FIG. 36(B).

In the character/icon selection table of FIG. 36(A), a character icon made of the character “Caution” in the normal display mode selected as the display when the hold display appears, and the effect selection of FIGS. 28(F) to (I). A second change in the display mode change effect by the character icon made up of the characters "opportunity" that can be selected as the first change display in the display mode change effect by the table and the effect selection table in Figs. 28(F) to (I). A character icon made up of the characters "intense heat" that can be selected as a display is set to be selectable. The degree of expectation of these character icons for a big hit has a relationship of “caution”<“opportunity”<“super heat”.

In the character icon selection table of FIG. 36(B), by the character icon of “one person” in the normal display mode selected as the appearance display of the hold display and the effect selection table of FIGS. 28(J) to (M). Character icons of "2 people" that can be selected as the first change display during the display mode change effect and the second selection display during the display mode change effect can be selected by the effect selection table of FIGS. 28(J) to (M). Character icons of “3 people” are set to be selectable. The degree of expectation of a jackpot for these character icons has a relationship of “1 person”<“2 persons”<“3 persons”.

Next, a change effect pattern table in which data for selecting the effect patterns of the above-described first change effect to fourth change effect is set will be described. The change effect pattern table is stored in the RAM 122.

FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a change effect pattern table. In the change effect pattern table, the effect patterns when the change effect is selected during the hold display and the change effect during the active display are selected according to the types of the first change effect to the fourth change effect. The production pattern at that time is shown. The selection of changing effect during the hold display and the selection of changing effect during the active display are performed using the data tables of FIGS. 28B to 28E.

When the hold display is selected for the first change effect, an effect pattern effect (see FIG. 38) in which the blue arrow acts downward with respect to the effect display of the effect target character icon is selected. Is executed. For the first change effect, when the active display is selected, the effect of the effect pattern in which the blue arrow acts in the horizontal direction is selected and executed with respect to the active display of the effect target character icon. ..

For the second change effect, when the hold display is selected, the effect of the effect pattern in which the red arrow acts downward is selected and executed with respect to the hold display of the character icon to be effected. .. For the second change effect, when the active display is selected, the effect of the effect pattern in which the red arrow acts in the horizontal direction is selected and executed with respect to the active display of the effect target character icon. ..

For the third change effect, when the hold display is selected, the effect of the effect pattern in which the blue arrow acts downward is selected and executed with respect to the hold display of the character icon of the effect target. .. For the third change effect, when the active display is selected, the effect of the effect pattern in which the blue arrow acts in the horizontal direction is selected and executed with respect to the active display of the effect target character icon. ..

For the fourth change effect, when the hold display is selected, the effect of the effect pattern in which the red arrow acts downward is selected and executed with respect to the hold display of the character icon to be effected. .. For the fourth change effect, when the active display is selected, the effect of the effect pattern in which the red arrow acts in the lateral direction is selected and executed with respect to the active display of the effect target character icon. ..

Next, an example of an effect display when a character icon is displayed as a hold display will be described. FIG. 38 is a display screen diagram showing an example of an effect display when the character icon 61 is displayed as a hold display on the image display device 5.

When a new first hold storage is generated and the hold display mode by the character icon is determined using the hold display mode determination table as shown in FIG. 25, first, as shown in FIG. 38(A). A display that causes a hold display by the character icon 61, which is a normal display mode, to be displayed in the first start winning a prize memory display area 5HL is displayed.

The change effect timing is selected and determined as "during hold display" by the character hold display change effect timing selection table of FIG. 28B, and the change effect type is selected by the character hold change effect type selection table of FIG. 28D. 38 is selected and determined to be the "first change effect", during the hold display after the first hold shift after the hold display by the character icon 61 for which "Caution" is displayed appears in FIG. 38(B). As shown, as the display mode change effect, the first change effect in which the blue arrow acts downward with respect to the hold display by the character icon 61 of "Caution" display is executed.

When the display after the first change effect is selected to be displayed as "intense heat" by the change selection table during the first change effect pending display in FIG. 28F, as shown in FIG. Display Mode by Change Effect After the execution of the change effect, the hold display by the character icon 61 is changed from the “caution” display to the “heat” display in the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL. In this way, when the hold display by the character icon 61 changes, the player's expectation for the big hit about the hold display can be increased, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Next, an example of the effect display when the character icon is displayed as the active display after the hold display will be described. FIG. 39 is a display screen diagram showing an example of effect display of active display after displaying the character icon 62 as a hold display on the image display device 5.

When the new first hold storage is generated and the hold display mode by the character icon is determined using the hold display mode determination table as shown in FIG. 25, first, as shown in FIG. 39(A). A display that causes a hold display by the character icon 62 called "one person" display, which is a normal display mode, to appear in the first start prize storage display area 5HL. In the state of FIG. 39(A), after the hold display by the character icon 62 of "1 person" display appears and displayed, the hold display before that is exhausted, and "1" is displayed as the hold display for the next variable display. The state in which the character icon 62 called "person" is displayed on hold is shown.

Then, the timing of the change effect is selectively determined as "actively displayed" by the character hold display change effect timing selection table of FIG. 28(C), and is changed by the character hold change effect type selection table of FIG. 28(E). When the effect type is selected and determined as "fourth change effect", the active display corresponding to the hold display by the character icon 62 displayed as "one person" as shown in FIG. 39(B) is the active display area. In AHA, this is performed by the character icon 62 displaying "one person". As shown in FIG. 39B, as a display mode change effect, a red arrow is displayed next to the active display by the character icon 62 displaying "one person". The fourth change effect that acts from the direction is executed.

Then, when the display after the third change effect is selected and determined to be the “three people” display by the fourth change effect active display change selection table of FIG. 28(M), as shown in FIG. 39(C), After the execution of the change effect by the fourth change effect, the hold display by the character icon 62 is changed from the “one person” display to the “three person” display in the active display area AHA. In this way, when the active display by the character icon 62 changes, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the big hit about the variable display this time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, an icon effect included in the effect execution setting process (S532) and used to set an effect when performing the hold display with the character icon and the character icon using the various data tables of FIGS. 28(B) to (M). The setting process will be described.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the icon effect setting process. Regarding the processing for setting the effect when performing the hold display or the active display by the character icon and the character icon using the various data tables of FIGS. 28B to 28M, the effect execution setting process described above (S532). As described above in relation to the processing content regarding the above, in FIG. 40, in order to clarify the flow of the setting of the effect when performing the hold display or the active display with the character icon and the character icon, a specific icon effect setting process is performed. The processing content will be described.

In the table of FIG. 25, when the character icon or the hold display mode of the character icon is selected and determined, the icon effect setting process is executed. In the icon effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 executes the following process. First, the random number value MR10 is extracted, and the change effect timing selection table shown in FIG. 28B or 28C is used according to the character icon or the hold display mode of the character icon selected in the table of FIG. Then, either "on hold display" or "active display" is selected and determined as the execution timing of the display mode change effect (S700).

Next, the random number value MR11 is extracted, and the change shown in FIG. 28D or FIG. 28E is made in accordance with the change effect execution timing of “during hold display” or “active display” selected and determined in S700. Using the effect type selection table, for "on hold display", "first change effect" or "second change effect" is selected and determined, and for "active display", "third change effect" or "3rd change effect". The fourth change effect" is selected and determined (S701).

Next, it is determined whether or not the "first change effect" is selected and determined in S701 (S702). When it is determined in S702 that the "first change effect" has been selected and determined, it is determined whether or not "in hold display" has been selected and determined in S700 (S703). When it is determined in S703 that "on-hold display" has been selected and decided, in order to execute the first change effect during the hold display, the random number value MR12 is extracted and the first change effect reservation of FIG. 28(F) is performed. Using the change-in-display selection table, one of "no change", "opportunity" display, and "extreme heat" display is displayed according to the display result (big hit, loss) Is selected and determined (S704), and the process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S703 that "during hold display" has not been selected and decided (when active display is selected and decided), in order to execute the first change effect during active display, the random number value MR12 28G, and using the first change effect active display change selection table of FIG. 28G, according to the display result (big hit, loss), “no change”, “opportunity” display, “super heat” display Any one of them is selected and determined as the display change mode after the first change effect (S705), and the process ends.

If it is determined in S702 that the "first change effect" has not been selected and determined in S701, it is determined whether or not the "second change effect" has been selected and determined in S701 (S706). When it is determined in S706 that the "second change effect" has been selected and determined, it is determined whether or not "holding display" is selected and determined in S700 (S707).

When it is determined in S707 that "holding display" has been selected and decided, in order to execute the second change effect during the hold display, the random number value MR12 is extracted and the second change effect holding of FIG. 28(H) is performed. Using the on-display change selection table, any one of "no change", "opportunity" display, and "extreme heat" display is displayed according to the display result (big hit, loss). Is selected and determined (S708), and the process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S707 that "during hold display" is not selected and decided (when active display is selected and decided), the random number value MR12 is executed in order to execute the second change effect during active display. 28I, using the change selection table during the second change effect active display of FIG. 28I, according to the display result (big hit, loss), "no change", "opportunity" display, "super heat" display Any one of them is selected and determined as the display change mode after the second change effect (S709), and the process ends.

If it is determined in S706 that the "second change effect" has not been selected and determined, it is determined whether or not the "third change effect" has been selected and determined in S701 (S710). When it is determined in S710 that the "third change effect" is selected and determined, it is determined whether or not "during hold display" is selected and determined in S700 (S711). If it is determined in S711 that "holding display" has been selected and decided, in order to execute the third change effect during the hold display, the random number value MR12 is extracted, and the third change effect holding of FIG. 28(J) is performed. Using the change-in-display selection table, depending on the display result (big hit, loss), any of "no change", "two people" display, and "three people" display can be changed after the third change effect. The mode is selected and determined (S712), and the process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S711 that "during hold display" is not selected and determined (when active display is selected and determined), the random number value MR12 is used to execute the third change effect during active display. 28K, and using the third change effect active display change selection table in FIG. 28K, “no change”, “two people” display, and “three people” display according to the display result (big hit, loss). Any one of them is selected and determined as the display change mode after the third change effect (S713), and the process ends.

If it is determined in S710 that the "third change effect" has not been selected and determined in S701, it is determined whether or not the "fourth change effect" has been selected and determined in S701 (S714). When it is determined in S714 that the "fourth change effect" has been selected and determined, it is determined whether or not "during hold display" has been selected and determined in S700 (S715). When it is determined in S715 that "holding display" has been selected and decided, in order to execute the fourth change effect during the hold display, the random number value MR12 is extracted and the fourth change effect holding of FIG. 28(L) is performed. Using the change-in-display selection table, change any of "no change", "two people" display, and "three people" display according to the display result (big hit, loss) after the fourth change effect. The mode is selected and determined (S716), and the process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S715 that "during hold display" is not selected and determined (when active display is selected and determined), the random number value MR12 is used to execute the fourth change effect during active display. Is extracted, and the change selection table during the fourth change effect active display of FIG. 28(M) is used to display “no change”, “two people”, and “three people” according to the display result (big hit, loss). Any one of them is selected and determined as the display change mode after the fourth change effect (S717), and the process ends.

By the icon effect setting process described above, the effect using the character icon or the character icon is set, and the variable display effect effect process (S172) is executed based on the setting in the process, for example, in FIG. The pending display mode change effect as described above and the variation corresponding display mode change effect as shown in FIG. 39 are executed.

[Modifications of display mode change effect by icon display] Next, various modifications of the effect of the active display as described above will be described.

(A) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 28(B) to (M), FIG. 38, and FIG. 39, one timing during the hold display and one timing during the active display are 2 in total. An example has been shown in which the display mode change effect for changing the display mode of the character icon display or the character icon display can be executed at any one of the four timings. However, without being limited to this, as shown in FIG. 41, the execution timing of the display mode change effect during the hold display may be selectable from a plurality of timings.

FIG. 41 is an explanatory view showing an example of effect for selecting the execution timing of the display mode change effect during the hold display from a plurality of timings. FIG. 41(A) shows the first start winning a prize memory display area 5HL and the active display area AHA for explaining the timing of the display mode change effect. FIG. 41(B) shows a modification of the character hold display change effect timing selection table shown in FIG. 28(B). FIG. 41(C) shows a modification of the character hold display change effect timing selection table shown in FIG. 28(C).

With reference to FIG. 41(A), in this modification, a character icon is displayed at any one of the three timings, that is, two timings during the hold display and one timing during the active display, Alternatively, a display mode change effect that changes the display mode of the character icon display can be executed. The two display mode change effect execution timings during the hold display are, for example, the number "2" in the hold display areas to which the numbers "1" to "4" are attached in the first starting prize winning memory display area 5HL. When the hold display is displayed in the display area in which the hold display corresponding to the second oldest hold storage marked with is displayed (while the first hold is being displayed), the first oldest hold with the number "1" is added. That is, when the hold display is performed in the display area where the hold display corresponding to the storage is performed (during the second hold display).

In this modification, as described above, the display mode change effect is executed at one selected timing from the three timings of the first pending display, the second pending display, and the active display. In this modification, when the character icon display is on hold display, the timing is selected using the character hold display change effect timing selection table of FIG. 41(B). In the table of FIG. 41(B), as in the table of FIG. 28(B), the ratio of selection of the display mode change of the character icon is set to be lower during active display than during hold display. On the other hand, in this modified example, when the hold display is performed in the character icon display, the timing is selected using the character hold display change effect timing selection table of FIG. 41(C). In the table of FIG. 41C, similarly to the table of FIG. 28C, the proportion of selection of the display mode change of the character icon is set to be lower during the hold display than during the active display. With this setting, in this modification, the same effect as that of the above-described embodiment can be obtained. Furthermore, if done in this way, the production becomes more varied, and the interest of the production can be further improved.

Further, when the hold display is performed in the character icon display, the closer to the hold display area where the hold display appears, the higher the selection ratio is set. As a result, when the display is changed to the character icon display, the display mode change effect is executed at the timing of the first hold display, and the display mode change is executed at the timing of the second hold display. Thus, the selection ratios of “no change”, “opportunity” display, and “intense heat” display may be different (for example, the higher the selection ratio, the lower the selection ratio of “intense heat” display).

In this modification, for example, a part (two) of the four hold display areas is targeted, and the display mode change effect can be executed during the hold display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode change effect may be executed during the hold display for all the hold display areas. As for the active display, the period during which the active display is continued is divided into a plurality of periods, and each of the plurality of periods is a period in which the display mode change effect can be executed, and one of the periods is changed in the display mode. It may be selectable as the period for performing the effect. By doing so, the effect becomes more varied, and the fun of the effect can be further improved.

The timing for executing the display mode change effect includes the ones described as the above-described embodiment and modification, and among the plurality of timings during the period of the pending display period and the variable display period corresponding to the pending storage that is the target. Any timing may be set as long as it is executed at any timing.

(B) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 36 and the like, when the hold display is a character icon, an example in which the display mode of the character icon is changed by the display mode change effect is shown. An example in which the display mode of the character icon is changed by the display mode change effect when the icon is used is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification of the change pattern of the display mode change effect, for example, when the hold display is a character icon, the character icon is changed to a character icon or the like by the display mode change effect at a predetermined ratio. You may change to another icon. Further, when the hold display is made with a character icon, an effect of changing the character icon to another icon such as a character icon by a display mode change effect may be performed at a predetermined rate. With such an effect, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the change of the display mode of the specific display (display mode of the icon) or the change of the type of the specific display (type of the icon). The interest can be further improved.

In this modification, as the changed icon, for example, a character icon, and like the character icon, an icon display that can be displayed when the hold display appears may be used, and is not displayed when the hold display appears, A specific icon display may be used.

(C) The active display change effect (success effect) and the active display change gust effect (failure effect) as described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 30 are displayed through the display mode change effect as described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 41. It may be applied to active display. Specifically, after starting the active display with the icon shape as described above, in the first system change effect as described above, the effect until the graphic group Y1 collides with the active display and the second system change effect. In, the effect until the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame surrounding the active display is executed.

After that, the success effect or the failure effect is executed. As a successful effect, in the first system change effect, an effect in which one of the shapes “star” of the shape group Y1 collides with the active display and the icon display changes to “a display mode in which a star is capped”, In the second system change effect, an effect in which the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame and the line thickness of the active display frame changes, and both the first system change effect and the second system change effect are executed and active. An effect or the like for changing the display or display mode of the active display frame or the like is executed.

On the other hand, as the failure effect, in the first system change effect, an effect that disappears before any figure of the shape “star” of the figure group Y1 collides with the active display and the display mode of the active display does not change, In the system change effect, the arrow Y2 disappears before the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame, and the line thickness of the active display frame is not changed, both the first system change effect and the second system change effect. Execution is performed to execute an effect that does not change the display mode of one or both of the active display and the active display frame.

That is, a common effect (common effect) is executed when the active display mode is changed and when it is not changed. In this case, as described above, the ratio of executing the success effect is controlled to be different depending on which timing of the plurality of timings during execution of the variable display, which is to execute the common effect.

In this way, when the active display change effect (success effect) described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 36B is executed after the active display displayed through the above-described display mode change effect is executed, the display is performed. The expectation for a big hit may be set higher than when the active display change effect or the like is not executed after the active display displayed through the mode change effect is executed.

(D) In the above-described embodiment, an example has been shown in which the display mode change effect as shown in FIGS. 35 to 41 can be executed during either the hold display or the active display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode change effect may be executed at both the timings of the hold display and the active display.

(E) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the display mode change effect as shown in FIGS. 35 to 41 can be executed at any one timing during the hold display period and the active display period has been shown. However, the display mode change effect is not limited to this, and the display mode change effect may be executed stepwise at a plurality of times during the hold display period and the active display period. In that case, for example, the change mode of the icon display may be divided into a plurality of stages for selection, and the icon display may be selected and set so as to be changed in stages at a plurality of timings.

(F) In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the hold display or active display that is the target of the display mode change effect as shown in FIGS. 35 to 41 is displayed in the shape of an icon. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold display or active display that is the target of the display mode change effect may be any display mode different from the normal display mode (for example, “sphere”), and is not limited to the icon shape. .. Therefore, even if the hold display or the active display hold display that is the target of the display mode change effect is a sphere, a display mode different from the display mode such as the shape and the color acquired by the normal display (for example, the size is different, the color is different). Are different).

(G) If there are a plurality of types of hold display or active display (for example, the type of icon display selected at the time of hold appearance display) that is the target of the display mode change effect as shown in FIGS. Of the plurality of timings during the display period and the active display period, a type in which no display mode change effect is executed during the hold display period may be included, and a display mode change effect is executed during the active display period. Types not included may be included.

(H) In the above-described embodiment, with respect to the hold display as the execution target of the display mode change effect as shown in FIGS. 35 to 41, the hold display as shown in FIG. Although an example in which only the display mode at the time of appearance display is selected and determined has been shown, during such a start winning a prize (at the time of holding storage), during the holding display or the active display as shown in FIGS. 28F to 28M. The final display mode (no change, "opportunity", "intense heat", "2 people", "3 people", etc.) after the effect of changing the hold display mode may be selected and determined.

(I) In the above-described embodiment, the display mode of the hold display that is the execution target of the display mode change effect as shown in FIGS. 35 to 41 is a character icon as shown in FIG. 25, or , But the color of the character icon and the color of the character icon may be selected and determined as in the case of the “sphere” described above. That is, as the display mode of the hold display that is the execution target of the display mode change effect, a combination of the icon shape and the icon color may be selectable. Then, even with the same icon, the expectation for the big hit may be set differently depending on the selected color.

(J) The display mode change effect of the above-described icon display may be executed on condition that the number of holdings is a predetermined number such as 3 or 4 or more.

(K) The icon display during the hold display and the icon display during the active display do not have to be completely the same icon display. For example, the icon display in the hold display is displayed in a first color such as white, while the icon display in the active display is displayed in a second color such as black. The display mode of the icon display during active display may be partially different. In addition, regarding the character icons, the characters of the icons that are on hold display are displayed in Mincho type, the characters of the icons that are in active display are displayed in block type, etc., but the characters are the same, but the typeface may be different. .. Regarding the character icons, the number of persons may be the same, but the genders may be different, such that the icon that is being held and displayed is a male character, and the icon that is being actively displayed is a female character.

(L) In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the hold display and the active display are displayed on the same display means (image display device 5), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold display and the active display are different display means. (For example, the hold display is displayed on the first image display device and the active display is displayed on the second image display device).

(M) In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the hold display and the active display are displayed using different display areas, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the same display area may be used for switching display. Good (for example, the active display area is not displayed when the hold display is displayed, and the hold display area is not displayed when the active display is displayed).

(N) In the above-described embodiment, the presentation mode (type) of the display mode change effect may be different depending on the display mode (character icon, character icon) of the icon display. For example, a dedicated display mode change effect corresponding to the display mode (effect mode) of the icon display may be provided and the effect may be executed.

Next, the notice effect setting process included in the effect execution setting process (S532) for setting the notice effect corresponding to the variation other than the active display change effect will be described.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the notice effect setting process. The process for setting the notice effect corresponding to the variation other than the active display change effect has been described above in relation to the process content regarding the effect execution setting process (S532) described above. In order to clarify the flow of setting the notice production or the notice production having a higher expectation than the normal expectation, the details of the notice production setting process will be described.

In the notice effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 executes the following process. First, a random number value MR14 (not shown) is extracted, and according to the variation pattern, by using the normal expectation effect pattern table shown in FIG. 43, the normal expectation effect showing the execution pattern of the effect of the normal expectation with respect to the fluctuation. A pattern is selected (S720). It should be noted that the normal expectation effect is an effect having a lower expectation degree than a high expectation effect described later.

FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a normal expectation effect pattern table. The normal expectation effect pattern table shows the proportions of the normal expectation effect patterns 1 to 9 determined for each variation pattern. Further, as shown in FIG. 43, in this embodiment, the notice effect for the variation can be executed at three timings, that is, the variation start, the high speed variation, and the reach establishment. Specifically, at the start of the change, it is possible to execute the notice effect of either the normal expectation A or the normal expectation B, which are different effect modes, and during the high speed change, the notice effects which are different from each other are used. It is possible to execute the notice production of either the expectation C or the normal expectation D, and when the reach is established, it is possible to execute the notice production of either the normal expectation E or the normal expectation F which are different production modes. Is. In the normal expectation effect patterns 1 to 9, whether or not to execute the notice effect of the normal expectation degree at each timing is set, respectively, and an effect mode in the case of execution. Therefore, by selecting one of the normal expectation effect patterns 1 to 9, whether or not to execute the notice effect having the normal expectation at each timing is determined.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects any one of the first to fourth high expectation effect pattern tables shown in FIGS. 44 to 46 according to the display mode of active display and the execution mode of zone effect. (S721).

In this embodiment, the active display in the active display area AHA is displayed in the same manner as the hold display. Therefore, in S<b>721, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the active display is the display state of the character icon and is “heat” or the display state of the character icon is “three people”. It is determined that a high-expectancy hold change effect is being executed as the look-ahead notice effect targeting the fluctuation. Further, when the zone effect of the second effect mode is being executed, it is determined that a high-anticipation zone effect is being executed as the look-ahead notice effect targeting the fluctuation. When neither the high-expectancy hold change effect nor the high-expectancy zone effect is executed, the first high-expectancy effect pattern table shown in FIG. 44 (when the high-expectancy prefetch effect is not generated) Select. When only the high-expectancy hold change effect is being executed, the second high-expectancy effect pattern table (when the high-expectancy hold change effect occurs) shown in FIG. When only the zone effect is executed, the third high expectation effect pattern table (when the high expectation zone effect occurs) shown in FIG. 45B is selected. When both the high-expectancy hold change effect and the high-expectancy zone effect are executed, the fourth high-expectancy effect pattern table (when the high-expectancy hold change effect and the high-expectancy zone effect occur ) Is selected.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 extracts a random number value MR15 (not shown), and uses the high-expectation effect pattern table selected in S721 in accordance with the change pattern to execute a high-expectation effect execution pattern for the change. A high expectation effect pattern indicating is selected (S722).

44 to 46 are diagrams showing the high-expectation degree effect pattern table. The high-expectation effect pattern table shows the proportion of each high-expectation effect pattern determined for each variation pattern. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 44 to 46, in this embodiment, at the start of fluctuation, it is possible to execute a notice effect of either high expectation A or high expectation B, which are different effect modes. During the high-speed fluctuation, it is possible to execute the advance notice production of either the high expectation C or the high expectation D, which are different production modes, and when the reach is established, the high expectations E and the high expectations E which are different production modes. It is possible to execute any notice production with the degree of expectation F. In each of the high-expectation effect patterns, whether or not to execute the high-anticipation notice effect at each timing is set, and the effect mode when the high-expectation effect is executed is set. Therefore, by selecting one of the high-expectancy effect patterns, whether or not to execute the high-anticipation notice effect at each timing is determined.

What is characteristic of the first to fourth high-expectancy degree effect pattern tables shown in FIGS. 44 to 46 is different depending on whether or not a high-anticipation look-ahead notice effect targeting the fluctuation is executed. It is configured to determine the presence/absence of execution of the high-anticipation notice production for the fluctuation (presence/absence of execution at each timing and the manner of production) in proportion.

For example, if the look-ahead notice effect and the notice effect for the variation are configurations in which the effect setting is performed separately for the same notice target, there is a possibility that the player may be informed that the result is far from the actual result. .. Specifically, even when the display result is off or in a variation pattern that does not develop into super reach (that is, in the case of a variation pattern with a low expectation), a high-predictive look-ahead notice effect with a low proportion and a high expectation If it is possible to execute the notice effect for the variation and perform the effect setting separately, the high-anticipation look-ahead notice effect and the high-expectation notice effect for the variation may be executed. In such a case, the player may have a high sense of expectation even though the fluctuation pattern is actually low in expectation, and there is a possibility that disappointment in the case of misalignment may increase. is there. Therefore, in this embodiment, whether or not to execute the high-anticipation notice effect for the variation is determined according to whether or not the high-anticipation notice effect for the variation is executed. Is configured.

Further, in this embodiment, the high-anticipation notice effect for the fluctuation can be executed at three timings, that is, the fluctuation start time, the high speed fluctuation time, and the reach establishment time. It is configured to make a collective decision instead of making a decision.

For example, in the case of a configuration in which whether or not to execute the high-expectation notice production for the fluctuation is determined for each timing, there is a possibility that the player may be informed that the content is far from the actual result. Specifically, even when the display result is out of order or in the case of a fluctuation pattern that does not develop into super reach (that is, in the case of a fluctuation pattern with a low expectation), a notice effect for the fluctuation with a high expectation at each timing at a low rate. If it is possible to execute each of the above, and if it is configured to determine whether or not to execute each of them separately, there may be a case in which the notice production for the fluctuation of high expectation is executed multiple times. In such a case, the player may have a high sense of expectation even though the fluctuation pattern is actually low in expectation, and there is a possibility that disappointment in the case of misalignment may increase. is there. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is configured to collectively determine, instead of determining whether or not to execute each timing.

As described above, in this embodiment, whether or not to execute the high-anticipation notice effect for the fluctuation is determined according to whether or not the high-anticipation look-ahead notice effect targeting the fluctuation is executed. In addition, with respect to the high-anticipation notice effect for the fluctuation, whether or not the execution is performed is not individually determined for each timing, but is collectively determined. With this configuration, it is possible to manage the total number of times the high-anticipation effect is executed for the same notification target through the look-ahead notification effect and the notification effect for the change.

Specifically, as shown in the first high-expectation effect pattern table, when the high-anticipation look-ahead notice effect targeting the change is not executed, the high-anticipation notice effect for the change is given. It is set to be executed up to three times (see high expectation effect patterns 7 to 11). Further, as shown in the second high-expectancy effect pattern table and the third high-expectancy effect pattern table, either the high-expectancy hold change effect or the zone effect is used as the look-ahead notice effect targeting the fluctuation. If it is being executed, the high-anticipation notice effect for the change is set to be executed up to twice (see high-expectancy effect patterns 4 to 6). In addition, as shown in the fourth high-expectation degree effect pattern table, when a high-expectancy hold change effect and a zone effect are executed as the pre-reading notice effect targeting the fluctuation, the high-expectation degree for the fluctuation is high. It is set that the notice production of the degree of expectation is executed at most once (see high expectation degree production patterns 1 to 3). That is, the pre-reading notice effect and the notice effect for the change are configured to be executed up to a total of three times with high expectations. As described above, in this embodiment, the total number of times the high-anticipation effect is executed is configured to be managed by the look-ahead notice effect and the notice effect for the variation. With this configuration, it is possible to suggest an appropriate expectation to the player through the look-ahead notice effect and the notice effect for the change.

In addition, in this embodiment, by controlling the total number of times that the high-anticipation effect is executed by the look-ahead notice effect and the notice effect for the variation, the high-expectation effect is achieved through the look-ahead notice effect and the notice effect for the variation. The degree of expectation is increased as the number of times the degree effect is executed increases. Further, the big hit is determined when the high-anticipation effect is executed three times through the look-ahead notice effect and the change notice effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the number of times the high-expectation production is executed interesting.

It should be noted that, in this embodiment, the high-anticipation effect is executed at most three times through the pre-reading notice effect and the notice effect for the variation, and the jackpot is determined when the effect is performed three times. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be executed at least four times or more, and the big hit may be determined when the maximum number of times is executed. Further, the maximum number of executions of high-expectation effects may be changed according to the gaming state. For example, the low probability state may be different from the high probability state. Further, for example, the maximum number of executions of the high-expectation effect may be changed by changing the setting by the game machine administrator, or may be changed by the player selecting the game mode. You may

Further, in the present embodiment, the high-expectation notice effect for the fluctuation is configured to collectively determine whether or not to execute each timing, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and It is sufficient that the total number of executions of the high-anticipation notice production can be managed. For example, with respect to the high-anticipation notice effect for the fluctuation, whether or not to execute is determined for each timing, and the determined total number of executions is the maximum number of executions of the high-expectation effect determined according to the variation pattern. If it exceeds the limit, a part may be replaced with the notice effect of the normal expectation.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs a process of replacing the effect content based on the selected high-expectation degree effect pattern (S723). In S723, for example, when the normal expectation effect pattern 5 is selected in S720 and the high expectation effect pattern 3 is selected in S722, the notice effect executed when the reach is established is changed from the normal expectation level E to the high expectation level. The process of replacing with E is performed. The notice effect executed at the start of fluctuation is set so that the notice effect having the normal expectation A is executed as it is.

By the notice effect setting process described above, the normal expectation effect and the high expectation effect are set, and the variable display effect effect process (S172) is executed based on the setting in the process, thereby performing active display. A notice effect other than the change effect is executed for the change.

In this embodiment, in S721, when the zone effect of the second effect mode is being executed, that is, when the background screen is red (however, the subject of advance notice is unknown), there is a high expectation of zone effect. However, for example, when performing a zone effect capable of specifying the variable display of the notice subject by performing the countdown display, the zone effect of the second effect mode is performed, and If the subject of advance notice is the change, it may be determined that the high-zone expectation effect is being executed.

In addition to the high-anticipation notice effect set in the notice effect setting process, for example, when the active display changes to the "three people" display of the character icon due to the active display change effect, or when the character icon "heats up". Even when the display is changed, it may be managed as if a high-anticipation notice production with respect to the change is being performed. In this case, in the notice effect setting process, the high expectation effect pattern table may be selected according to the setting content of the icon effect setting process.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the look-ahead notice effect (in this example, the pre-reading notice effect) suggesting that the pending storage that is in the advantageous state is stored in the pending storages stored in the pending storage means. A notice effect that is capable of executing a pending change effect and a zone effect, and suggests that the variable display during execution is in an advantageous state (in this example, an active display change effect and a notice effect of a normal expectation for the change). And a high-predictive notice effect), and the effect execution means changes the hold display mode before the variable display of the target hold storage is executed. (For example, change during pending display shown in FIG. 38) and/or change corresponding display mode change (for example, change during active display shown in FIG. 39) that changes the mode of change corresponding display during execution of the change display. A display mode changing unit capable of executing the display mode change at any one of a plurality of timings during the pending display period and the variable display period corresponding to the target pending storage (for example, The effect control CPU 120 includes S532 shown in FIG. 27, the icon effect setting process shown in FIG. 40, and the part that executes the process such as S172 shown in FIG. Then, the display mode changing means has a first specific display (for example, the character icon display in FIG. 36A) and a second specific display (for example, FIG. ) Character icon display)), the selection ratio of the timing to execute the display mode change is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 28B and 28C, the character icon display is a hold display). The change effect execution rate is high, the character icon display is high while the character icon display is active, and the display mode is actually changed when the change effect is executed, as shown in FIGS. The ratio is the same during the hold display and the active display.Therefore, depending on whether it is the character icon display or the character icon display, the display mode of the icon is changed between the hold display and the active display. The frequency of change is different, and the ratio of selecting whether to change the display mode during hold display or active display is different.) In addition, the effect execution means executes the notice effect in accordance with the execution mode of the prefetch notice effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs the high expectation pending change effect and the zone effect in the notice effect setting process shown in FIG. 42. 44 to 46, one of the first to fourth high expectation effect pattern tables shown in FIG. 44 to FIG. 46 is selected, and a high expectation effect for the fluctuation is set). There is. Therefore, regarding the pending display mode change and the change-corresponding display mode change, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the display type of the change target and the timing of the display mode change, and improve the interest of the game with respect to the pending display mode change. be able to.

Further, for example, if the look-ahead notice effect and the notice effect for the variation are configurations in which the same notice target is set separately, there is a possibility that the player may be informed that the result is far from the actual result. There is. For example, even when the display result is out of order or when the fluctuation pattern does not develop into super reach (that is, when the fluctuation pattern has low expectation), a high rate of high-predictive look-ahead notice production and a high-anticipation notice of the fluctuation With the configuration in which effects can be performed and effect settings can be separately set, a high-anticipation look-ahead notice effect and a high-anticipation notice effect for the change can be obtained even in the case of a variation pattern with low expectations. It may be executed. In such a case, the player may have a high expectation even though the fluctuation pattern is actually low in expectation, and the discouragement in the case of deviation may increase. There is. Therefore, in this embodiment, the notice effect is configured to be executed according to the execution mode of the look-ahead notice effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to show an appropriate degree of expectation to the player through the look-ahead notice effect and the notice effect.

Further, in this embodiment, the effect execution means can execute a plurality of types of prefetching notice effects (in this example, the pending change effect and the zone effect can be executed by a plurality of effect modes). It is configured to execute the advance notice effect according to the execution mode of the effect (for example, even when the prefetch advance notice effect is executed, the high expectation advance notice effect is executed and the high expectation advance effect is executed). A different high-expectation effect pattern table is selected in S721 when a pre-reading notice effect other than the expectation degree is being executed, and a high-expectation effect for the fluctuation is set). Therefore, it is possible to make an interest in which prefetch advance notice effect is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the effect executing means limits the number of times of execution of the look-ahead notice effect and the notice effect whose expectation for the variation display is higher than a predetermined degree (for example, through the look-ahead notice effect and the notice effect for the change). , And manages the number of times a high-expectation production is executed). Therefore, it is possible to manage the number of executions of the effect whose expectation is higher than the predetermined degree.

In addition, in this embodiment, the effect execution means executes the prefetching notice effect and the notice effect such that the degree of expectation varies depending on the timing of execution even if the effect contents are the same (for example, regarding the character icon display, As shown in FIGS. 28(B) and 28(C), the proportion of selection of the display mode change of the character icon during active display is lower than that during active display, but as shown in FIGS. 28(F) to (I). , When the big hit display result is obtained, the display mode change to be the “extreme heat” display having a higher expectation level is selected more frequently during the active display than during the hold display. It is possible to have a higher expectation that a big hit will be obtained when the display changes to the “opportunity” display or the “two-person” display during the hold display, rather than the “opportunity” display or the “two-person” display. It seems that the expectation of a big hit is higher when changing to "Intense heat" or "Three people" during active display than when changing to "Intense heat" or "Three people" during hold display May be used). Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the timing when the effect is executed.

In this embodiment, in the notice effect setting process, the first to fourth high expectation effect pattern tables are selected according to the presence or absence of execution of the high-anticipation look-ahead notice effect and the number of executions, and the selected table is selected. By selecting a high-expectation effect pattern using, the number of executions of the high-anticipation notice effect for the fluctuation is determined, but the high-expectation effect of the high-expectation effect is predicted through the look-ahead notice effect and the notice effect for the fluctuation. The configuration for managing the number of executions is not limited to this. For example, the upper limit number of executions of the high-anticipation notice production is determined according to the presence or absence and the number of executions of the high-anticipation notice production, and based on the determined upper limit execution number, You may make it decide the notice production of an expectation degree. In addition, for example, in the prize-winning effect determination process, it is possible to determine the high-expectation pre-reading notice effect and the upper limit number of executions of the notice effect for the target fluctuation.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45, as a high-anticipation look-ahead notice effect, a high-expectancy hold change effect is executed and a high-expectancy zone effect is executed. In this case, the high expectation effect patterns are selected at the same rate, but they may be selected at different rates. Further, the expectations may be different depending on the combination of the high-expectancy pending change effect or the high-expectancy zone effect and the high-expectancy effect pattern.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 43 to 46, the normal anticipation notice effect and the high expectation notice effect for the fluctuation can be executed at the start of fluctuation, at the time of high speed fluctuation, and at the time of reach establishment. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be executed at any timing such as when the super reach is developed, immediately before the stop of the fluctuation, or every pseudo-coupling fluctuation. Further, in this embodiment, the notice effect for the fluctuation is determined at the same rate regardless of the gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous state (for example, the probable variation state or the time saving state) is the normal state. ), the presence or absence of the notice effect and the effect mode may be determined at different rates by using different tables.

Further, in this embodiment, the high-anticipation effect patterns shown in FIGS. 44 to 46 are selected regardless of the big hit type, but the selection ratio may be different depending on the big hit type. For example, the high expectation effect pattern 10 may be selected only in the case of the most advantageous big hit (for example, probability variation big hit).

In the above description, the active display change effect for the active display has been described, but the hold change effect, which is the same effect mode as the active display change effect, is executed for the hold display displayed in the starting winning prize memory display area 5H. May be.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, after the hold display is displayed in a special mode, the above-described common effect is executed as a suggestive effect that suggests a successful effect and a failure effect, so that the execution ratios are different, for example, , May be raised, and after the hold display is displayed in a special mode, a suggestion effect that suggests an active display change effect for the active display corresponding to the hold display (for example, the success effect and the failure effect are commonly executed. For example, the suggestion effect suggesting the common effect) may be increased so that the execution ratios of executing the same effect or different modes are different. In addition, when the display mode of the hold display displayed in the starting prize winning memory display area 5H as shown in FIGS. 32 and 33 is the special mode, the active display change effect is displayed with respect to the hold display displayed in the special mode. For example, the execution ratio of executing the pending change effect executed in the same or different effect mode may be different, for example, may be increased.

In the above description, the active display change effect for the active display has been described, but for example, a character with a hammer appears in the hold effect for the hold display, and the effect effect of hitting the first hold display with the hammer is executed. It is a decorative pattern when the display mode of the hold display is changed or when the decorative pattern is composed of a total of 9 types of 8 types of alphanumeric characters "1" to "8" and one character image. There may be an effect mode in which the character pops out from the character image and the effect effect is executed on the hold display of the target.

In the above description, the display mode at the time of addition of the hold display has been described. However, in the case of determining whether to change the display mode of the hold display displayed in the display mode at the time of addition and changing the display mode of the hold display. 25 or 32, the display mode of the hold display may be determined based on the setting example of the display mode determination table of the hold display as shown in FIG. 32, and the timing of changing the display mode of the hold display may be determined. The timing of changing the display mode of the hold display may be a predetermined timing such as the next change.

In the above description, as the first system change effect, an effect mode in which the display mode of the active display is changed by a group of figures configured by combining a plurality of figures, and as the second system change effect, the display mode of the active display frame by the arrow Although the presentation mode of changing the is not limited to a figure or an arrow, for example, a presentation mode in which a character or the like appears to change the display mode of the special image including the active display and the active display frame may be used.

In the above description, an example in which the display mode of the additionally displayed hold display (display mode at the time of addition) is white has been described. However, like the setting example based on the hold display mode determination table as shown in FIGS. In addition, for example, the display mode of the hold display is determined so that it is additionally displayed in any of four colors (eg, red, yellow, blue, white) or five colors (eg, red, yellow, blue, white, gray). Alternatively, the display mode of the hold display may be determined so as to be additionally displayed by the display mode of 3 colors or less or 6 colors or more, and the display mode of the hold display may be added by the color of the hold display or the characters or symbols drawn on the hold display. The display mode of the hold display may be determined to be displayed, and the display mode of the hold display may be determined to be additionally displayed depending on the shape of the hold display (for example, heart shape, star shape, character type, etc.). Alternatively, the display mode of the hold display may be determined so as to be additionally displayed depending on the movement of the hold display (for example, the motion pattern of the character in the character-type hold display).

In the above description, the active display may be erased from the image display device 5 immediately before the final stop of the decorative design, or the active display may be erased when the variation of the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5L is stopped. Of course, the active display may be erased after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation.

In the above description, after the common effect is performed on the active display displayed in the active display area AHA, the display mode of the special image showing the information including the active display corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the variable display. An example of executing a failure effect that does not change the display mode of the special image representing the information including the active effect corresponding to the variable effect and the pending display corresponding to the variable display has been described. After performing a common effect that is commonly executed for both the success effect and the failure effect for any of the hold effects displayed on the screen, the display mode of the success effect or the hold effect is changed. You may execute the failure production which does not change.

In addition, after performing a success effect or a failure effect on any of the hold displays displayed in the starting prize winning memory display area 5H, the hold display becomes the variable display, and the hold display corresponding to the variable display is performed. A success effect or a failure effect may be further executed with respect to the special image showing the information including the active display. In this case, for example, when there is a start winning a prize to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, in step 160 or step 163 in FIG. 23, each of the hold displays displayed in the starting winning memory display area 5H is displayed. On the other hand, the success/failure effect execution/non-execution for the hold display, the effect mode, the execution timing for executing the effect, the display mode of the hold display, etc. are determined according to the variation category, and the active display corresponding to each hold display is determined. When the special image showing the information including the active display, the success/failure effect is executed, the effect mode, the display mode of the special display, etc. are determined according to the variation category and the like, as shown in FIG. The determination content may be stored in the first prefetching notice buffer 194C and the second prefetching notice buffer 194D.

In the above description, as an example, the second system change effect of the effect mode by the arrow Y2 on which the character “intense heat” is drawn has been described, but the character may not be drawn on the arrow Y2, and other characters may be used. May be drawn, or a character or the like may be drawn. In addition, when there are a plurality of types of effect forms as the second system change effect, the success effect is determined depending on which of the second system change effects the effect mode of the second system change effect is selected. The degree of expectation of execution may be different. Further, the second system change effect may be an effect that suggests the display mode of the special image after the successful effect execution, by the effect mode of the second system change effect.

Next, modifications and characteristic points of the embodiment described above will be listed below.
(1) Although the embodiment of the present invention has been described above, various types of device including the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the process shown in the flowchart, and the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5 are described. The production operation and the like can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

(2) When the display mode of the active display displayed in the active display area AHA is a special mode, the hold change effect is executed for any of the hold displays displayed in the starting winning prize memory display area 5H. Of course, if any of the hold displays displayed in the starting prize winning memory display area 5H has a hold display that is displayed in a special manner, any of the hold displays displayed in the starting winning prize memory display area 5H or the active display Alternatively, the pending change effect or the active display change effect may be executed.

(3) Either the first system change effect or the second system change effect may be an effect that changes the color of the active display in the display mode of the active display. In this case, for example, like the first system change effect that changes the shape and the second system change effect that changes the thickness of the line of the active display frame, it is displayed in the hold display displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H. The display mode of the active display so that the display mode is a color having a higher expectation of a big hit than the color of the hold display (for example, yellow or red in the case of the hold display displayed in blue) You can change the color at.

(4) In order that the degree of expectation that the success effect is executed is different depending on the color of the active display included in the special image displayed in the active display area AHA, for example, FIGS. You may use the setting example of the determination rate of the effect mode set like 29(C), and the success effect with respect to active display is performed by the color of the active display contained in the special image displayed in active display area AHA. It is also possible to use a setting example of the determination rate of the display mode set so that the determination rate of the display mode of the active display such as the color of the active display after the setting is different.

(5) For example, in the example of setting the determination ratio by the active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table in FIG. 28, the ratio of “execution” and “no execution” of the active display change effect of the variation pattern “PA4-X” is set. , 45% (the sum of the first system change effect 15%, the second system change effect 10%, the first system change effect and the second system change effect 20%) vs. 55%, "execution available" and "no execution" 28" may be set, and the ratio of "executed" and "not executed" is 0% vs. 100% as in the variation pattern "PA1-X" in FIG. The ratio according to the embodiment may be set such that any one of the plurality is set as 0%.

(6) In the probability variation control, a specific area may be provided in advance in the special winning opening, and the gaming machine may be controlled to the probability variation state based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific area. For example, based on a random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the game ball enters a specific area within the winning a prize hole by being assigned to a plurality of jackpot types such as "non-probable variation", "probable variation", and "probability". It may be a gaming machine that controls the gaming state to be easy and controls the gaming ball to a probable variation state based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through this specific area.

(7) In addition, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the process shown in the flowchart, various performance operations including the performance image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, and the like of the present invention. Any changes and modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the invention.

(8) A game score for use in a game is given and given by using a frequency that is a game value of a size specified by information recorded on a game recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by hitting a game ball enclosed in the gaming machine into a gaming area by using the gaming score or the gaming score provided by a prize for the game.

That is, based on the game medium having passed through the starting area provided in the game area, variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified and deriving and displaying the display result is provided. This is a gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed on the display means. However, when the gaming score is not 0, the gaming score is used in the gaming machine. The game is performed by hitting the game ball enclosed in the game area, the game score is subtracted according to the hitting of the game ball, and the game ball is won in accordance with the winning area provided in the game area. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that adds points. Such a game machine has a game recording medium insertion slot for inserting a game recording medium in which information capable of specifying the magnitude of the game value that can be used for adding game scores is inserted, and a game recording medium. A game recording medium processing means for reading the record information recorded in the game recording medium inserted into the medium insertion opening may be provided.

(9) In the above description, in order to notify the effect control microcomputer (effect control CPU 120) of the change time and the change pattern indicating the change mode such as the type of reach effect and the presence/absence of pseudo-relation, when the change is started. Although an example of transmitting one fluctuation pattern command is shown, the fluctuation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103) determines whether the first command indicates whether or not there is a pseudo-relation, whether or not there is a sliding effect, and the like before reaching (when not reaching). To the so-called second stop time) and a command indicating the variation mode, and the second command indicates the type of the reach and the presence/absence of the re-lottery effect, etc. after reaching the reach (when the reach is not reached). May transmit a command indicating a variation time or a variation mode after the so-called second stop). In this case, the effect control microcomputer may perform effect control in the variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of the two commands. In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 notifies the fluctuation time by each of two commands, and the concrete fluctuation mode executed at each timing is selected by the effect control microcomputer. Good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined time has elapsed after sending the first command (for example, the next timer interrupt (In) the second command may be transmitted. It should be noted that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the transmission order can be changed as appropriate. By thus notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern command can be reduced.

(10) The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium. It may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device included in a computer device or the like. Furthermore, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

(11) The game execution mode is not limited to that executed by mounting a removable recording medium, but by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executable or may be directly executed by using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

(12) In the above-described embodiment, the “ratio (ratio, probability)” is illustrated, but the “ratio (ratio, probability)” is not limited to this, and is, for example, a value within the range of 0% to 100%. Of these, a value including 0%, a value including 100%, and a value not including 0% and 100% may be used.

(13) In the above-described embodiment, an example of the probability variation state control is shown in which the variation display result is derived and displayed as the probability variation big hit, and after the big hit game state ends, the probability variation state is unconditionally controlled to the probability variation state. However, not limited to this, when the detection means detects that the game ball has passed a specific region provided in the special winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 7, the probability variation determining device is controlled to the probability variation state. The type of probable variation state control may be performed.

(14) In the above-described embodiment, for example, a plurality of types of special symbols and decorative symbols “1” to “9” are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed. It is not limited to the mode. For example, the variably displayed symbol does not necessarily have to be the same as the derivatized displayed symbol, and a symbol different from the variably displayed symbol may be derivatized and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be performed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be executed by alternately lighting and blinking the one type of symbol display. And, even in this case, one kind of symbol used for the variable display may be finally displayed and derived, or a symbol different from the one kind of symbol may be finally derived and displayed. It may be one.

(15) In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 side determines whether or not it is a big hit, and a variation time type winning determination (prefetch determination), and a command indicating the winning determination result (designation of symbol). Command, variation category command), and the CPU 120 side for effect control executes the pre-reading notice effect based on the command indicating the winning determination result, but it is not limited to such a mode, and for example, The effect control CPU 120 side may be configured to perform a winning determination (prefetch determination). In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a command designating only the values of the big hit determination random number (random R) and the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) extracted when the start winning occurs. Alternatively, the effect control CPU 120 side may be configured to perform the winning determination (prefetch determination) based on the values of the random numbers designated by those commands.

(16) It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplifications in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the scope of the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the scope of the claims and all modifications within the scope.

INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY The present invention is suitably applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine in which a player can play a predetermined game.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 151A 1st special figure reservation storage section 151B 2nd special figure reservation storage section 194A 1st start winning award reception command buffer 194B 2nd starting award reception command buffer 5 Image display device 102 RAM
5HL 1st start winning prize memory display area 5HR 2nd starting prize winning memory display area 120 CPU for effect control
Y1 figure group Y2 arrow AHA active display area

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that displays variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
With respect to the variable display that has not been started yet, a pending storage means for storing it as pending storage,
Hold display means capable of displaying a hold display corresponding to the hold storage stored by the hold storage means,
A variation correspondence display means capable of displaying a variation correspondence display corresponding to the variation display during execution of the variation display,
It is possible to execute a look-ahead notice effect that suggests that the holding storage in the advantageous state is stored among the holding storages stored in the holding storage means, and the variable display during execution becomes the advantageous state. And a production execution means capable of executing a preliminary production that suggests that
The effect execution means changes the hold display mode in which the mode of the hold display is changed before the variable display of the target hold storage is executed, and the change correspondence in which the mode of the change correspondence display is changed during the execution of the change display. At least one of the display mode change and the display mode change can be executed at any timing of a plurality of timings during the pending display period and the variable display period corresponding to the target pending storage. Including display mode changing means,
The display mode changing means selects the timing of executing the display mode change according to whether the type of display to be changed is the first specific display or the second specific display different from the normal display. Is different,
A game machine characterized in that the effect execution means executes a notice effect according to an execution mode of the prefetch notice effect.

Images